WO2018098708A1 - 一种移动性管理方法、基站及可穿戴设备 - Google Patents

一种移动性管理方法、基站及可穿戴设备 Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2018098708A1
WO2018098708A1 PCT/CN2016/108083 CN2016108083W WO2018098708A1 WO 2018098708 A1 WO2018098708 A1 WO 2018098708A1 CN 2016108083 W CN2016108083 W CN 2016108083W WO 2018098708 A1 WO2018098708 A1 WO 2018098708A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
base station
signal quality
source base
handover
cell
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2016/108083
Other languages
English (en)
French (fr)
Inventor
杨皓睿
何岳
金辉
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Priority to PCT/CN2016/108083 priority Critical patent/WO2018098708A1/zh
Priority to CN201680080724.9A priority patent/CN108605258B/zh
Publication of WO2018098708A1 publication Critical patent/WO2018098708A1/zh

Links

Images

Classifications

    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00—Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • H04W36/08—Reselecting an access point
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W88/00—Devices specially adapted for wireless communication networks, e.g. terminals, base stations or access point devices
    • H04W88/02—Terminal devices
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W88/00—Devices specially adapted for wireless communication networks, e.g. terminals, base stations or access point devices
    • H04W88/08—Access point devices

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to the field of communications, and in particular, to a mobility management method, a base station, and a wearable device.
  • Wearable Device refers to a smart device that is worn by the human body and that implements continuous interaction using a separate operating system. And with the saturation of the smartphone industry market, WD directly connected to the network and network communication will become the trend of future development. However, due to the small size of the WD, the battery is small and only a single antenna technology can be used, which results in a short standby time of the WD and a low transmission efficiency when communicating with the network.
  • the user plane of the WD can be indirectly connected to the network through the UE, so as to perform uplink and downlink user planes with the network.
  • the interaction of data in order to maximize the reuse of the existing control flow, WD can continue to use the direct connection with the network for uplink and downlink signaling interaction. Therefore, while the WD is indirectly connected to the network through the UE, the WD also retains the network. direct connection.
  • the WD since the WD is transmitting uplink and downlink signaling through a direct connection with the network, the WD can autonomously measure the signal quality of the cell where the current base station is located, and determine that the signal quality of the cell where the current base station is located cannot be satisfied. When the service demands, the measurement report is reported to the current base station to switch to another cell that can meet its service requirements.
  • both the WD and the UE can autonomously measure the signal quality of the cell where the current base station is located and report the measurement report to the current
  • the base station in this case, may occur when the WD and the UE move together, and the handover operation is performed by the current base station.
  • the handover operation is performed at the WD.
  • the indirect connection with the current base station must be converted into a direct connection with the current base station, and the conversion process is complicated, which results in serious power consumption of the WD and increases the processing load on the network side. .
  • the embodiment of the present invention provides a mobility management method, a base station, and a wearable device, which solves the problem that the power consumption of the WD caused by the handover operation of the current base station is severe during the process of moving the WD and the UE together, and the processing load on the network side is aggravated.
  • the problem is a mobility management method, a base station, and a wearable device, which solves the problem that the power consumption of the WD caused by the handover operation of the current base station is severe during the process of moving the WD and the UE together, and the processing load on the network side is aggravated. The problem.
  • the embodiment of the present invention adopts the following technical solutions:
  • a first aspect of the embodiments of the present invention provides a mobility management method, including:
  • the source base station receives the measurement report sent by the WD, and the measurement report sent by the WD includes: a signal quality indicator obtained by the WD, a signal quality of the current camping cell obtained by the WD measurement, a signal quality and an identifier of the at least one neighboring cell, and Determining that the signal quality of the currently camped cell obtained by the received WD measurement is lower than the first measurement threshold, and determining that the received signal quality of each neighboring cell is higher than the third measurement threshold, determining that the WD needs to perform a handover operation.
  • the source base station sends a first handover request including the first relay indication to the first target base station corresponding to the first target cell.
  • the first relay indication is used to indicate that the first target base station performs a common handover to the WD and the UE.
  • the signal quality indicator is used to indicate the signal quality of the side link between the WD and the UE, and the deterioration trend of the signal quality; the WD is directly connected to the source base station for transmitting signaling, and is indirectly connected to the source base station by the UE,
  • the current camping cell refers to the cell where the WD served by the source base station is located.
  • the source base station determines that the WD needs to perform handover, and determines that the WD and the UE need to perform common handover according to the signal quality indication obtained by the WD. And after determining, by the first target cell, the first handover target that includes the first relay indication, Making the first target base station available The first relay indicates an operation of performing a common handover to the WD and the UE.
  • the side link between the WD and the UE does not need to be disconnected, so that when the WD performs handover, there is no need to perform an operation of converting the indirect connection with the source base station into a direct connection with the source base station, and further In the process of moving the WD and the UE together, the power consumption of the WD caused by the handover operation of the current base station is severe, and the processing load on the network side is aggravated.
  • the mobility management method provided by the embodiment of the present invention may further include: the source base station receiving the measurement report sent by the UE, where the measurement report sent by the UE includes: a signal quality indicator obtained by the UE, a signal quality of the currently camped cell measured by the UE, and Determining the UE, the signal quality of the at least one neighboring cell, and determining that the signal quality of the currently camped cell measured by the UE is lower than the first measurement threshold, and determining that the signal quality of each neighboring cell is higher than the second measurement threshold Need to switch operations.
  • the source base station determines that the WD and the UE need to perform the common handover according to the signal quality indicator obtained by the WD. Specifically, the source base station determines that the WD and the UE need to perform the common handover according to the signal quality indicator obtained by the WD and the signal quality indicator obtained by the UE. .
  • the measurement report sent by the UE received by the source base station further includes : Side Link ID (SLI).
  • SLI Side Link ID
  • the mobility management method provided by the embodiment of the present invention may further include: determining, by the source base station, the WD corresponding to the SLI from the at least two WDs as the WD that needs to be jointly switched with the UE. .
  • the measurement report sent by the UE received by the source base station further includes: an identifier of the at least one neighboring cell.
  • the source base station determines the first target cell according to the identifier of the neighboring cell included in the measurement report sent by the WD, and specifically includes: at least one neighboring cell included in the measurement report sent by the source base station from the WD, and the UE sends the Selecting a candidate cell group from among at least one neighboring cell included in the measurement report, where the candidate cell group is selected At least one candidate cell is included, and each candidate cell belongs to at least one neighboring cell included in the measurement report sent by the WD and at least one neighboring cell included in the measurement report sent by the UE.
  • the source base station determines the candidate cell as the first target cell, and when the candidate cell group includes at least two candidate cells, the source base station selects at least two candidates.
  • the cell with the best signal quality measured by the UE in the cell is determined as the first target cell.
  • the first handover request sent by the source base station to the first target base station may further include: a context of the UE and a context of the WD, where the UE is The context and the context of the WD are used by the first target base station to allocate resources and PC5 radio resources required for accessing the first target base station to the UE and the WD, so that the first target base station can multiplex the context of the received UE and the context of the WD.
  • the UE and the WD are allocated resources and PC5 radio resources required for accessing the first target base station, which further reduces the processing load of the first target base station.
  • the PC5 radio resource is used by the WD and the UE to update the side link resource between the WD and the UE.
  • the mobile provided by the embodiment of the present invention
  • the method may further include: receiving, by the source base station, the first handover request acknowledgement that is sent by the first target base station, including the second relay indication, the first handover command, and the second handover command, and sending the first handover command to the UE,
  • the WD sends a second switching command.
  • the second relay indication is used to notify the source base station that the first handover request acknowledgement is an acknowledgement for the common handover of the UE and the WD, and the first handover command includes the resource required by the UE to access the first target base station and the PC5 radio resource.
  • the second handover command includes resources required by the WD to access the first target base station and PC5 radio resources.
  • the WD in another possible implementation manner, in the case that the WD performs separate handover, the WD also needs to first convert the indirect connection with the source base station into a direct connection with the source base station. In order to switch, there is also a problem that the power consumption of the WD is severe and the processing load on the network side is increased. In order to save the power of WD and reduce the processing load on the network side in the case of WD switching alone, this The mobility management method provided by the embodiment of the invention may further include: determining, by the source base station, that the WD needs to perform a separate handover according to the signal quality indicator obtained by the WD.
  • the cell with the best signal quality in the neighboring cell is the cell to which the WD needs to be separately switched, that is, the second target cell.
  • the source base station sends a second handover request including the context of the WD to the second target base station corresponding to the second target cell.
  • the mobile provided by the embodiment of the present invention may further include: the source base station receiving the second handover request acknowledgement sent by the second target base station including the resources required for the WD to access the second target base station. And sending a third switching command and indication information to the WD.
  • the third handover command includes resources required for the WD to access the second target base station, and the indication information is used to indicate that the WD disconnects the side link with the UE.
  • the source base station determines, according to the signal quality indicator obtained by the WD and the signal quality indicator obtained by the UE, that the WD and the UE need to perform common handover, which may specifically include
  • the source base station determines, according to the side link signal strength and the first indication obtained by the WD, and the UE obtains the side link signal strength and the first indication, that the WD and the UE need to perform a common handover, and the side link signal strength is used to indicate between the WD and the UE.
  • the first indication is for indicating a deterioration trend of the signal quality of the side link between the WD and the UE; or the source base station determines the WD and the UE according to the second indication obtained by the WD, and the UE obtains the second indication A common handover is required, the second indication being used to indicate the signal quality of the side link between the WD and the UE and the deterioration trend of the signal quality of the side link between the WD and the UE.
  • a second aspect of the embodiments of the present invention provides a mobility management method, including:
  • the target base station receives a first handover request that is sent by the source base station and includes a first relay indication, where the first relay indication is used to indicate that the target base station performs a common handover to the WD and the UE. And performing a common handover to the WD and the UE according to the first handover request.
  • the WD is directly connected to the source base station for transmitting signaling, and is indirectly connected to the source base station by the UE for transmitting user plane data.
  • the target base station can receive the source base And transmitting, by the station, a first handover request including the first relay indication, and performing a common handover operation on the WD and the UE according to the first relay indication. Since the WD and the UE can perform the common handover, the side link between the WD and the UE does not need to be disconnected, so that when the WD performs handover, there is no need to perform an operation of converting the indirect connection with the source base station into a direct connection with the source base station, and further In the process of moving the WD and the UE together, the power consumption of the WD caused by the handover operation of the current base station is severe, and the processing load on the network side is aggravated.
  • the first handover request received by the target base station may further include: a context of the UE and a context of the WD.
  • the target base station performs a common handover on the WD and the UE according to the first handover request, which may include: the target base station multiplexes the context of the UE and the context of the WD, and allocates the UE and the WD according to the context of the UE and the context of the WD. Entering a resource required by the target base station and the PC5 radio resource, and transmitting, to the source base station, a first handover request acknowledgement including the second relay indication, the first handover command, and the second handover command.
  • the second relay indication is used to notify the source base station that the first handover request acknowledgement is an acknowledgement for the common handover of the UE and the WD, and the first handover command includes the resource required by the UE to access the target base station and the PC5 radio resource, and the second The handover command includes resources required by the WD to access the target base station and PC5 radio resources.
  • the WD in another possible implementation manner, in the case that the WD performs separate handover, the WD also needs to first convert the indirect connection with the source base station into a direct connection with the source base station. In order to switch, there is also a problem that the power consumption of the WD is severe and the processing load on the network side is increased.
  • the mobility management method provided by the embodiment of the present invention may further include: the target base station receives the second Context including the WD sent by the source base station, in order to save the power of the WD and reduce the processing load on the network side. Switch the request.
  • the target base station may further include: the target base station allocates and allocates the WD according to the context of the WD.
  • Target base station for data Transmit the required Data Radio Bearer (DRB) resources and the resources required to access the target base station.
  • DRB Data Radio Bearer
  • the mobility management method provided by the embodiment of the present invention may further include: sending, by the target base station, a mobility management entity (Mobile Management Entity, MME) directly A path transition indication indicating that the MME has disconnected the side link with the UE.
  • a mobility management entity Mobile Management Entity, MME
  • a third aspect of the embodiments of the present invention provides a mobility management method, including:
  • the WD measures the signal quality of the currently camped cell, and measures the signal quality of the at least one neighboring cell, and the WD determines that the measured signal quality of the currently camped cell is lower than the first measurement threshold, and currently resides.
  • the measurement report is sent to the source base station, where the measurement report sent by the WD includes: a signal quality indicator obtained by the WD, and the current camped cell obtained by the WD measurement. Signal quality, and signal quality and identity of at least one neighboring cell whose signal quality is higher than the third measurement threshold.
  • the WD receives the second handover command sent by the source base station, including the resource required by the WD access target base station and the PC5 radio resource, and accesses the target base station according to the received resource required by the access target base station, and according to the received
  • the PC5 radio resource updates the side link resources between the WD and the UE.
  • the WD is directly connected to the source base station for transmitting signaling, and is indirectly connected to the source base station by the UE, and is used for transmitting user plane data.
  • the current camped cell refers to the cell where the source base station is located, and the signal quality indicator is used for indicating The signal quality of the side link between the WD and the UE, as well as the deterioration of the signal quality.
  • the WD transmits, to the source base station, the signal quality including the WD obtained for indicating the side link between the WD and the UE, and the deterioration trend of the signal quality.
  • a measurement report of the signal quality indication so that the source base station determines, according to the received signal quality indication of the received WD, that the WD and the UE need to perform a common handover.
  • the side link between the WD and the UE does not need to be disconnected, so that when the WD is switched, There is no need to perform an operation of converting the indirect connection with the source base station into a direct connection with the source base station, thereby solving the problem that the power consumption of the WD caused by the switching operation of the current base station is severe during the movement of the WD and the UE, and the network side Dealing with the problem of increased burden.
  • the WD may further include: the WD receiving the third source that is sent by the source base station and includes the resources required by the WD access target base station. And switching the command and the indication information, and accessing the target base station according to the resources required by the access target base station, and disconnecting the side link with the UE according to the indication information.
  • the method before the sending the measurement report to the source base station, the method further includes: acquiring, by the WD, the side link signal strength and the first indication, to obtain a signal quality indicator,
  • the side link signal strength is used to indicate the signal quality of the side link between the WD and the UE
  • the first indication is for indicating a deterioration trend of the signal quality of the side link between the WD and the UE
  • the WD acquires the second indication to obtain A signal quality indication
  • the second indication is used to indicate a signal quality of a side link between the WD and the UE and a deterioration trend of a signal quality of a side link between the WD and the UE.
  • a fourth aspect of the embodiments of the present invention provides a source base station, including:
  • a receiving unit configured to receive a measurement report sent by the wearable device WD; the WD is directly connected to the source base station, and is used for transmitting signaling, and is indirectly connected to the source base station by using the user equipment UE, and is used for transmitting user plane data, and the measurement sent by the WD
  • the report includes: a signal quality indicator obtained by the WD, a signal quality of the currently camped cell obtained by the WD, and a signal quality and identifier of at least one neighboring cell, the signal quality indicator being used to indicate a side link between the WD and the UE.
  • a determining unit configured to determine that a signal quality of the currently camped cell obtained by the WD measurement received by the receiving unit is lower than a first measurement threshold, and determine each phase received by the receiving unit When the signal quality of the neighboring cell is higher than the third measurement threshold, it is determined that the WD needs to perform a handover operation, and according to the signal quality indication obtained by the WD received by the receiving unit, it is determined that the WD and the UE need to perform common handover, and are sent according to the WD received by the receiving unit.
  • the identifier of the neighboring cell included in the measurement report determines the first target cell; the first target cell is WD and UE And a sending unit, configured to send a first handover request to the first target base station corresponding to the first target cell that is determined by the determining unit, where the first handover request includes a first relay indication, where the first The indication is used to instruct the first target base station to perform a common handover to the WD and the UE.
  • the receiving unit is further configured to receive a measurement report sent by the UE, where the measurement report sent by the UE includes: a signal quality indicator obtained by the UE, and the current camped cell measured by the UE a signal quality, and a signal quality of the at least one neighboring cell; the determining unit is further configured to: after determining that the signal quality of the currently camped cell measured by the UE received by the receiving unit is lower than the first measurement threshold, and determining that the receiving unit receives When the signal quality of each neighboring cell is higher than the second measurement threshold, determining that the UE needs to perform a handover operation; determining unit, specifically for the signal quality indication obtained by the WD received according to the receiving unit and the signal quality indicator obtained by the UE It is determined that the WD and the UE need to perform a common handover.
  • the measurement report sent by the UE received by the receiving unit further includes: The side link identifier SLI; the determining unit is further configured to determine, from the at least two WDs, the WD corresponding to the SLI as the WD that needs to be jointly switched with the UE.
  • the measurement report sent by the UE received by the receiving unit further includes: an identifier of the at least one neighboring cell, and a determining unit, specifically for receiving And selecting, by the at least one neighboring cell included in the measurement report sent by the WD, the at least one neighboring cell included in the measurement report sent by the UE, the candidate cell group, where the candidate cell group includes at least one candidate a cell; when the candidate cell group includes one candidate cell, the candidate cell is determined as the first target cell; when the candidate cell group includes at least two candidate cells, the at least two candidate cells are included The cell with the best signal quality measured by the UE is determined as the first target cell.
  • the first handover request sent by the sending unit further includes: a context of the UE and a WD Context; the context of the UE and the context of the WD are used by the first target base station to allocate the resources and PC5 radio resources required for accessing the first target base station to the UE and the WD, and the PC5 radio resources are used for updating the WD and the UE between the WD and the UE. Side link resources.
  • the receiving unit is further configured to receive a first handover request acknowledgement sent by the first target base station, where the first handover request acknowledgement includes the second a relay indication, a first handover command, and a second handover command;
  • the second relay indication is used to notify the source base station that the first handover request acknowledgement is an acknowledgement for the common handover of the UE and the WD, and the first handover command includes the UE accessing the first
  • the sending unit is further configured to send the first handover command received by the receiving unit to the UE. And sending a second switching command received by the receiving unit to the WD.
  • the determining unit is further configured to determine, according to the signal quality indicator obtained by the WD received by the receiving unit, that the WD needs to perform a separate handover; And determining, by the receiving unit, the measurement report sent by the WD, the cell with the best signal quality in the neighboring cell as the second target cell; the second target cell is the cell to which the WD needs to be separately switched; the sending unit, And a second handover request is sent to the second target base station corresponding to the second target cell determined by the determining unit, where the second handover request includes a context of the WD.
  • the receiving unit is further configured to receive a second handover request acknowledgement sent by the second target base station, where the second handover request acknowledgement includes the WD interface a resource required for the second target base station; the sending unit is further configured to send a third handover command and indication information to the WD, where the third handover command includes the resource required by the receiving unit to access the second target base station by the WD, and the indication The information is used to indicate that the WD disconnects the side link with the UE.
  • the determining unit is specifically configured to use the side link signal strength and the first indication obtained according to the WD, and the UE obtains the side link signal strength and the first Instructing to determine that the WD and the UE need to perform a common handover, and the side link signal strength is used to indicate a side link between the WD and the UE.
  • the first indication is used to indicate a deterioration trend of the signal quality of the side link between the WD and the UE; or, according to the second indication obtained by the WD, and the UE obtains the second indication, determining that the WD and the UE need to perform the common handover
  • the second indication is for indicating a signal quality of a side link between the WD and the UE and a deterioration tendency of a signal quality of a side link between the WD and the UE.
  • a fifth aspect of the embodiments of the present invention provides a target base station, including:
  • a receiving unit configured to receive a first handover request sent by the source base station, where the first handover request includes a first relay indication, where the first relay indication is used to indicate that the target base station performs a common handover on the wearable device WD and the user equipment UE,
  • the WD is directly connected to the source base station, and is used for transmitting signaling, and is indirectly connected to the source base station by the UE for transmitting user plane data.
  • the switching unit is configured to perform common to the WD and the UE according to the first handover request received by the receiving unit. Switch.
  • the first handover request received by the receiving unit further includes: a context of the UE and a context of the WD
  • the switching unit is specifically configured to: multiplex the UE received by the receiving unit Context of context and WD, and allocate resources and PC5 radio resources required for accessing the target base station to the UE and the WD according to the context of the UE and the context of the WD; transmitting a first handover request acknowledgement to the source base station; wherein, the first handover request acknowledges The second relay indication, the first handover command, and the second handover command are included; the second relay indication is used to notify the source base station that the first handover request acknowledgement is an acknowledgement for the common handover of the UE and the WD, and the first handover command includes the UE handover The resources required for the target base station and the PC5 radio resources, and the second handover command includes the resources required by the WD to access the target base station and the PC5 radio resources.
  • the receiving unit is further configured to receive a second handover request sent by the source base station, where the second handover request includes a context of the WD.
  • the method further includes: an allocating unit, configured to receive the WD according to the receiving unit And transmitting, by the WD, data radio bearer DRB resources required for data transmission with the target base station, and resources required for accessing the target base station; and sending, by the sending unit, the second handover request acknowledgement to the source base station; wherein, the second handover The request confirmation includes resources required by the allocation unit to allocate the WD to the target base station.
  • the sending unit is further configured to send a direct path transition indication to the mobility management entity MME, where the direct path transition indication is used to notify the MME that the WD is broken. Open the side link with the UE.
  • a WD including:
  • a measuring unit configured to measure a signal quality of the currently camped cell, and measure a signal quality of the at least one neighboring cell
  • the WD is directly connected to the source base station, and is used for transmitting signaling, and is used by the user equipment UE and the source base station
  • the indirect connection is used to transmit the user plane data
  • the sending unit is configured to: when determining that the signal quality of the current camping cell measured by the measuring unit is lower than the first measurement threshold, and the cell in the neighboring cell of the current camping cell exists When the quality is higher than the third measurement threshold, the measurement report is sent to the source base station, where the measurement report sent by the WD includes: a signal quality indicator obtained by the WD, a signal quality of the currently camped cell measured by the measurement unit, and at least one signal.
  • the signal quality indicator is used to indicate the signal quality of the side link between the WD and the UE, and the deterioration trend of the signal quality;
  • the receiving unit is configured to receive the source base station Sending a second handover command, where the second handover command includes resources required by the WD to access the target base station and PC5 radio resources;
  • updating unit updates the radio resource between the WD PC5 and the UE according to the receiving unit for receiving the side chain of resources.
  • the method further includes: a disconnecting unit; the receiving unit is further configured to receive a third switching command and indication information sent by the source base station, and the third switching The command includes the WD required to access the target base station.
  • the access unit is further configured to access the target base station according to the resource required by the access target base station received by the receiving unit, and the disconnecting unit is configured to disconnect from the UE according to the indication information received by the receiving unit. Side link.
  • the method further includes: an acquiring unit, configured to: acquire a side link signal strength and a first indication, to obtain a signal quality indicator, and a side link signal strength a signal quality indicating a side link between the WD and the UE, the first indication is for indicating a deterioration trend of a signal quality of a side link between the WD and the UE; or, obtaining a second indication to obtain a signal quality indication, The second indication is used to indicate the signal quality of the side link between the WD and the UE and the deterioration trend of the signal quality of the side link between the WD and the UE.
  • a seventh aspect of the embodiments of the present invention provides a source base station, including: a processor, a memory, and a transceiver;
  • the memory is configured to store a computer-executed instruction, and when the source base station is in operation, the processor executes the memory-stored computer-executable instructions to cause the source base station to perform the movement of any of the first aspect or the possible implementation of the first aspect.
  • Sexual management approach when the source base station is in operation, the processor executes the memory-stored computer-executable instructions to cause the source base station to perform the movement of any of the first aspect or the possible implementation of the first aspect.
  • An eighth aspect of the embodiments of the present invention provides a target base station, including: a processor, a memory, and a transceiver;
  • the memory is configured to store a computer-executed instruction, and when the target base station is in operation, the processor executes a memory-stored computer-executable instruction to cause the target base station to perform the movement of any of the second aspect or the possible implementation of the second aspect Sexual management approach.
  • a ninth aspect of the embodiments of the present invention provides a WD, including: a processor, a memory, and a transceiver;
  • the memory is for storing computer execution instructions, and when the WD is running, the processor executes the memory stored computer execution instructions to cause the WD to perform the mobility management as described in any of the third aspect or the possible implementation of the third aspect method.
  • a tenth aspect of the embodiments of the present invention provides a computer storage medium for storing computer software instructions used by the source base station, where the computer software instructions are included
  • the program designed by the above mobility management method is executed.
  • a computer storage medium for storing computer software instructions for use by the target base station, the computer software instructions including a program designed to execute the mobility management method.
  • a computer storage medium for storing computer software instructions for use in the WD, the computer software instructions comprising a program designed to execute the mobility management method.
  • FIG. 1 is a simplified schematic diagram of a system architecture to which an embodiment of the present invention is applied according to an embodiment of the present invention
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic structural diagram of a base station according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic structural diagram of a WD according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 4 is a flowchart of a mobility management method according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 5 is a flowchart of another mobility management method according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 6 is a flowchart of another mobility management method according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 7 is a flowchart of another mobility management method according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 8 is a flowchart of another mobility management method according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic structural diagram of another source base station according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic structural diagram of another source base station according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic structural diagram of another target base station according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic structural diagram of another target base station according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic structural diagram of another target base station according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic structural diagram of another WD according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 15 is a schematic structural diagram of another WD according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 16 is a schematic structural diagram of another WD according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • system and “network” are used interchangeably herein.
  • the term “and/or” in this context is merely an association describing the associated object, indicating that there may be three relationships, for example, A and / or B, which may indicate that A exists separately, while There are three cases of A and B, and B alone.
  • the character "/" in this article generally indicates that the contextual object is an "or" relationship.
  • the embodiment of the present invention provides a mobility management method, and the basic principle thereof. Yes: the source base station receives the measurement report sent by the WD, and determines that the signal quality of the currently camped cell obtained by the WD measurement is lower than the first measurement threshold, and the signal quality of each neighboring cell included in the measurement report is higher than the third.
  • the source base station When the threshold is measured, it is determined that the WD needs to perform a handover operation, and the source base station further determines, according to the signal quality indicator obtained by the WD, that the WD and the UE need to perform a common handover, and determines the first target cell according to the identifier of the neighboring cell included in the measurement report sent by the WD. And transmitting, to the first target base station corresponding to the first target cell, a first handover request including the first relay indication.
  • the source base station sends a first handover request including the first relay indication to the first target base station, so that the first target base station can perform a common handover operation on the WD and the UE according to the first relay indication. Since the WD and the UE can perform the common handover, the side link between the WD and the UE does not need to be disconnected, so that when the WD performs handover, there is no need to perform an operation of converting the indirect connection with the source base station into a direct connection with the source base station, and further In the process of moving the WD and the UE together, the power consumption of the WD caused by the handover operation of the current base station is severe, and the processing load on the network side is aggravated.
  • the system architecture may include: a source base station 11 , a WD 12 , a UE 13 , an MME 14 , a Serving GateWay (S-GW) 15 , and a target base station 16 .
  • S-GW Serving GateWay
  • the WD 12 establishes a direct connection with the source base station 11, and performs uplink and downlink signaling interaction through the direct connection, and the WD 12 establishes an indirect connection with the source base station 11 through the UE 13, and performs user plane data interaction through the indirect connection.
  • the WD 12 and the UE 13 jointly switch to the target base station 16
  • the WD 12 establishes a direct connection with the target base station 16, and performs uplink and downlink signaling interaction through the direct connection
  • the WD 12 establishes an indirect connection with the target base station 16 through the UE 13, and passes the indirect connection.
  • the connection interacts with the user plane data.
  • the base station (which may be the source base station 11 in the embodiment of the present invention, or the target base station 16 in the embodiment of the present invention) may be a base station (BS) or a base station controller of a wireless communication.
  • BS base station
  • the base station is a device deployed in the radio access network to provide wireless communication functions for the WD12 or the UE 13.
  • the main functions of the base station are: management of radio resources, compression of an Internet Protocol (IP) header, and user data flow. Encryption, selection of MME 14 when user equipment is attached, routing of user plane data to S-GW 15, organization and transmission of paging messages, organization and transmission of broadcast messages, configuration of measurement and measurement reports for mobility or scheduling, etc. Wait.
  • IP Internet Protocol
  • a base station can include various forms of macro base stations, micro base stations, relay stations, access points, and the like.
  • the names of devices with base station functions may be different, for example, in an LTE system, called an evolved base station (evolved NodeB, eNB or eNodeB), in the third generation.
  • eNB evolved NodeB
  • eNodeB evolved NodeB
  • 3G 3rd Generation Telecommunication
  • the base station may be other devices that provide wireless communication functionality for WD 12 or UE 13.
  • a device that provides a wireless communication function for the WD 12 or the UE 13 is referred to as a base station.
  • WD12 including but not limited to smart watches, smart rings, smart wristbands, smart glasses, smart necklaces, smart rings, smart earrings, smart phones and other smart wearable devices.
  • WD12 itself can provide Bluetooth (BT), Wireless-Fidelity (Wi-Fi), Near Field Communication (NFC), Infrared, etc. Network connectivity.
  • BT Bluetooth
  • Wi-Fi Wireless-Fidelity
  • NFC Near Field Communication
  • Infrared etc.
  • the WD12 can be equipped with various types of sensors such as accelerometers, gyroscopes, magnetometers, light sensors, Global Positioning System (GPS), and input/output (I/O) components such as microphones and speakers.
  • WD12 can effectively detect user actions (such as running, walking, etc.), user physical signs data (such as heart rate, blood pressure, etc.) and the user's current location (ie, users). The location before it) and so on.
  • the UE 13 is a wireless terminal that can provide various available network connection capabilities such as BT, Wi-Fi, NFC, and infrared.
  • the wireless terminal can be a device that provides voice and/or data connectivity to the user, a handheld device with wireless connectivity, or other processing device that is connected to the wireless modem.
  • the wireless terminal can communicate with one or more core networks via a Radio Access Network (RAN).
  • RAN Radio Access Network
  • the wireless terminal can be a mobile terminal, such as a mobile phone (or "cellular" phone) and a computer with a mobile terminal, or can be a portable, pocket, handheld, computer built-in or in-vehicle mobile device that exchanges with the RAN Language and/or data, for example, Personal Communication Service (PCS) phones, cordless phones, Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) phones, Wireless Local Loop (WLL) stations, Personal Digital Assistants (Personal Digital) Assistant, PDA) and other devices.
  • PCS Personal Communication Service
  • SIP Session Initiation Protocol
  • WLL Wireless Local Loop
  • PDA Personal Digital Assistants
  • a wireless terminal may also be referred to as a user agent (User Agent) or a user device (User Device).
  • the MME 14 is mainly responsible for the transmission of Non-Access-Stratiction (NAS) signaling, NAS signaling encryption, roaming, tracking, and allocation of user temporary identity.
  • NAS Non-Access-Stratiction
  • the S-GW 15 is responsible for providing the WD12 and the UE 13 with service gateway functions, mobility anchor functions, and policy enforcement functions.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of a configuration of a base station according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the base station may be a source base station in the embodiment of the present invention, or may be a target base station in the embodiment of the present invention.
  • the base station may include At least one processor 21, a memory 22 and a transceiver 23.
  • the processor 21 may be a processor or a collective name of a plurality of processing elements.
  • the processor 21 may be a general central processing unit (CPU), or may be an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), or one or more programs for controlling the program of the present invention.
  • Integrated circuit such as one or more digital signal processors (DSPs), Or one or more field programmable gate arrays (FPGAs).
  • DSPs digital signal processors
  • FPGAs field programmable gate arrays
  • the processor 21 can perform various functions of the base station by running or executing a software program stored in the memory 22 and calling data stored in the memory 22.
  • processor 21 may include one or more CPUs, such as CPU0 and CPU1 shown in FIG.
  • a base station can include multiple processors, such as processor 21 and processor 24 shown in FIG.
  • processors can be a single core processor (CPU) or a multi-core processor (multi-CPU).
  • a processor herein may refer to one or more devices, circuits, and/or processing cores for processing data, such as computer program instructions.
  • the memory 22 can be a read-only memory (ROM) or other type of static storage device that can store static information and instructions, a random access memory (RAM) or other type that can store information and instructions.
  • the dynamic storage device can also be an electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), a compact disc read-only memory (CD-ROM) or other optical disc storage, and a disc storage device. (including compact discs, laser discs, optical discs, digital versatile discs, Blu-ray discs, etc.), magnetic disk storage media or other magnetic storage devices, or can be used to carry or store desired program code in the form of instructions or data structures and can be Any other media accessed, but not limited to this.
  • the memory can exist independently and be connected to the processor via a bus.
  • the memory can also be integrated with the processor.
  • the memory 22 is used to store application code for executing the solution of the present invention and is controlled by the processor 21.
  • the processor 21 is configured to execute application code stored in the memory 22.
  • the transceiver 23 is configured to communicate with other devices or communication networks, such as Ethernet, RAN, wireless local area networks (WLAN), and the like.
  • the transceiver 23 may include all or part of the baseband processor, and is also optional
  • a radio frequency (RF) processor is included.
  • the RF processor is used to transmit and receive RF signals
  • the baseband processor is used to implement processing of a baseband signal converted by an RF signal or a baseband signal to be converted into an RF signal.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of a composition of a WD according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the WD may include at least one processor 31, a memory 32, and a transceiver 33.
  • the processor 31 can be a processor or a collective name for a plurality of processing elements.
  • processor 31 may be a CPU, or an ASIC, or one or more integrated circuits for controlling the execution of the program of the present invention, such as one or more DSPs, or one or more FPGAs.
  • the processor 31 can perform various functions of the WD by running or executing a software program stored in the memory 32 and calling data stored in the memory 32.
  • processor 31 may include one or more CPUs, such as CPU0 and CPU1 in FIG.
  • the WD can include multiple processors, such as processor 31 and processor 34 in FIG. Each of these processors can be a single core processor or a multi-core processor.
  • a processor herein may refer to one or more devices, circuits, and/or processing cores for processing data, such as computer program instructions.
  • Memory 32 may be a ROM or other type of static storage device that may store static information and instructions, RAM or other types of dynamic storage devices that may store information and instructions, or may be EEPROM, CD-ROM or other optical disk storage, optical disk storage. (including compact discs, laser discs, optical discs, digital versatile discs, Blu-ray discs, etc.), magnetic disk storage media or other magnetic storage devices, or can be used to carry or store desired program code in the form of instructions or data structures and can be Any other media accessed, but not limited to this.
  • the memory can exist independently and be connected to the processor via a bus.
  • the memory can also be integrated with the processor.
  • the transceiver 33 is configured to communicate with other devices or communication networks, such as Ethernet, RAN, WLAN, and the like.
  • the transceiver 33 may include a receiving unit to implement a receiving function, and a sending list The meta implements the send function.
  • FIG. 4 is a flowchart of a mobility management method according to an embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 4, the method may include:
  • the WD measures the signal quality of the currently camped cell, and measures the signal quality of the at least one neighboring cell.
  • the current camped cell refers to the cell where the WD served by the source base station is located, and at least one neighboring cell is the cell that is obtained by the WD and is adjacent to the currently camped cell.
  • the WD is directly connected to the source base station and is indirectly connected to the source base station by the UE, and the WD currently has a service being transmitted, if the WD moves, the signal quality of the currently camped cell can be measured, and at least one The signal quality of neighboring cells is measured.
  • the WD sends a measurement to the source base station when determining that the measured signal quality of the currently camped cell is lower than the first measurement threshold, and the signal quality of the cell in the neighboring cell of the current camping cell is higher than the third measurement threshold. report.
  • the WD may determine that the measured signal quality of the currently camped cell is lower than the first.
  • the measurement threshold indicates that the signal quality of the current camping cell cannot meet the service requirement of the WD, and the neighboring cell of the current camping cell has a cell whose signal quality is higher than the third measurement threshold, that is, the signal quality of the neighboring cell exists.
  • the measurement report is sent to the source base station, where the measurement report sent by the WD includes: a signal quality indicator obtained by the WD, a signal quality of the current camped cell obtained by the WD, and at least one neighboring cell (the The at least one neighboring cell refers to the signal quality and identity of the cell in the neighboring cell of the current camping cell whose signal quality is higher than the third measurement threshold.
  • the signal quality indication obtained by the WD is used to indicate the signal quality of the side link between the WD and the UE, and the deterioration trend of the signal quality.
  • the WD can periodically measure the signal quality of the side link between the WD and the UE, and the deterioration trend of the signal quality can be determined according to the change of the measured signal quality in the preset time period. For example, the second measurement of WD results in lower signal quality than the first measurement, and the third measurement. Below the signal quality obtained by the second measurement, the WD can determine that the deterioration of the signal quality is deteriorating.
  • the source base station receives the measurement report sent by the WD.
  • the source base station determines, according to the measurement report sent by the WD, that the WD needs to perform a handover operation, and determines that the WD and the UE need to perform a common handover, and determine the first target cell.
  • the first target cell is a cell to which the WD and the UE need to be jointly switched.
  • the source base station may determine the WD measurement according to the signal quality of the current camped cell obtained by the WD measurement included in the measurement report sent by the WD, and the signal quality of the at least one neighboring cell.
  • the signal quality of the current camping cell is lower than the first measurement threshold, and determining that the signal quality of each neighboring cell is higher than the third measurement threshold, it is determined that the WD needs to perform a handover operation.
  • the WD it can be determined that the WD and the UE need to perform common handover.
  • the source base station may determine the first target cell according to the identifier of the at least one neighboring cell included in the measurement report sent by the WD.
  • the WD and the UE need to perform a common handover.
  • the WD and the UE do not need to perform a common handover when the signal quality of the side link between the WD and the UE is lower than the threshold and/or the signal quality is deteriorating.
  • the source base station sends a first handover request to the first target base station corresponding to the first target cell.
  • the first handover request includes a first relay indication, where the first relay indication is used to indicate that the first target base station performs a common handover to the WD and the UE.
  • the source base station may send the first target base station corresponding to the first target cell through the X2 interface.
  • a first handover request with a first relay indication is included.
  • the target base station receives a first handover request sent by the source base station.
  • the target base station performs a common handover to the WD and the UE according to the first handover request.
  • the source base station determines that the WD needs to enter The line is switched, and according to the signal quality indication obtained by the WD, it is determined that the WD and the UE need to perform a common handover. And after determining, by the first target cell, the first handover target that includes the first relay indication, The first target base station is caused to perform a common handover operation on the WD and the UE according to the first relay indication.
  • the side link between the WD and the UE does not need to be disconnected, so that when the WD performs handover, there is no need to perform an operation of converting the indirect connection with the source base station into a direct connection with the source base station, and further In the process of moving the WD and the UE together, the power consumption of the WD caused by the handover operation of the current base station is severe, and the processing load on the network side is aggravated.
  • the following embodiments of the present invention use the measurement report sent by the UE as the first measurement report, and the measurement report sent by the WD as the second measurement report as an example, which is provided by the embodiment of the present invention.
  • the mobility management method is described in detail.
  • FIG. 5 is a flowchart of a mobility management method according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the WD is indirectly connected to the network through the UE (where the UE and the WD are currently camped in the same cell), and is directly connected to the network, and the WD is currently connected.
  • the UE and the WD move together, there may be a situation in which the currently camped cell cannot meet the service requirement of the WD.
  • the power consumption the UE and the WD can jointly switch to another cell that can satisfy the service demand of the WD, so as to continue to provide services for the WD through the cell.
  • the method may include:
  • the source base station sends first measurement control signaling to the UE.
  • the first measurement threshold is used to determine whether the signal strength of the currently camped cell meets the service requirement of the UE.
  • the first measurement threshold is used to determine whether the signal strength of the currently camped cell meets the service requirement of the UE. .
  • the second measurement threshold is used to determine whether the signal quality of the first neighboring cell included in the first neighboring cell group meets the service requirement of the UE, and the first neighboring cell group may include at least one first neighboring cell, The first neighboring cell is currently camped with the UE A cell adjacent to the cell.
  • the UE can switch to another cell that can meet its service requirement in time, and the source base station can send the UE to the UE to determine the current camp in advance. Whether the cell and the cell adjacent to the currently camped cell meet the first measurement control signaling of the service requirement of the UE.
  • the source base station may configure different measurement thresholds for each first neighboring cell included in the first neighboring cell group, or may be configured for all first neighboring cells included in the first neighboring cell group.
  • the same measurement threshold may be configured to configure the same measurement threshold for the first neighboring cell included in the first neighboring cell group, and the measurement threshold configured for the first neighboring cell in the first neighboring cell group.
  • the UE receives the first measurement control signaling sent by the source base station.
  • the UE sends a first measurement report to the source base station.
  • the signal quality of the current camping cell and each first neighboring cell in the first neighboring cell group may be used.
  • the signal quality is measured, and determining, according to the first measurement threshold included in the received first measurement control signaling, whether the signal quality of the current camping cell meets the current service requirement, according to the second included in the first measurement control signaling.
  • the measurement threshold determines whether the signal quality of each first neighboring cell meets the current service requirement.
  • the UE determines that the signal quality of the current camping cell is lower than the first measurement threshold, it indicates that the signal quality of the currently camped cell cannot meet the current The service requirement, and determining that the signal quality of the first neighboring cell in the first neighboring cell group is higher than the second measurement threshold, that is, when the signal quality of the first neighboring cell can meet the current service requirement, the UE The first measurement report (Measurement Report) can be sent to the source base station.
  • the first neighboring cell with the signal quality in the first neighboring cell group being higher than the second measurement threshold is included in the third neighboring cell group.
  • the first measurement report may include: SLI, a signal quality of a currently camped cell measured by the UE, and each of the third neighboring cell groups. Signal quality and identity of the first neighboring cell, Side Link Signal Strength, and a first indication (the first indication may be a Side Link Signal Strength Deterioration Indicator);
  • the first measurement report may include: SLI, a signal quality of a currently camped cell measured by the UE, and a signal quality of each first neighboring cell in the third neighboring cell group. And the logo, and the second indication.
  • SLI refers to an identifier of a side link carried between the WD and the UE.
  • the SLI is used to determine the WD in the WD connected to the UE that needs to be jointly switched.
  • the side link signal strength is used to indicate a signal quality of a side link between the WD and the UE
  • the first indication is used to indicate a side between the WD and the UE
  • the deterioration trend of the signal quality of the link is to determine whether the UE and the WD need to perform common handover according to the deterioration of the signal quality and signal quality of the side link between the UE and the WD.
  • the value of the first indication may be: 0 or 1.
  • the signal quality that can represent the side link with 0 is not deteriorating, and the signal quality of 1 represents the side link is getting worse, in another In a possible implementation manner, the signal quality that can be represented by 1 for the side link is not deteriorating, the signal quality of 0 for the side link is deteriorating, or other values can be used to indicate the deterioration of the signal quality of the side link. trend.
  • the value of the first indication is 0 or 1.
  • the signal quality of the side link is not degraded by 0, and the signal quality of the side of the side link is degraded as an example.
  • the side link signal strength is higher than the threshold, the first indication is 0, and the side link signal strength and the first indication are used to indicate that the signal quality condition of the side link between the WD and the UE satisfies the condition of the common handover.
  • the side link signal strength is higher than the threshold, the first indication is 1, and the side link signal is strong.
  • the degree and the first indication are used to indicate that the signal quality condition of the side link between the UE and the WD does not satisfy the condition of the common handover.
  • the side link signal strength is lower than the threshold, and the first indication is 0. At this time, the side link signal strength and the first indication are used to indicate that the signal quality condition of the side link between the UE and the WD does not satisfy the condition of the common handover.
  • the side link signal strength is lower than the threshold, the first indication is 1, and the side link signal strength and the first indication are used to indicate that the signal quality condition of the side link between the UE and the WD does not satisfy the condition of the common handover.
  • the side link signal strength included in the first measurement report sent by the UE to the source base station is higher than a threshold, and the first indication is 0, and the two are used to indicate that the signal quality of the side link between the UE and the WD is satisfied.
  • Common switching conditions it is assumed that the side link signal strength included in the first measurement report sent by the UE to the source base station is higher than a threshold, and the first indication is 0, and the two are used to indicate that the signal quality of the side link between the UE and the WD is satisfied.
  • the second indication is used to indicate a deterioration trend of signal quality and signal quality of the side link between the WD and the UE, so as to be based on the signal quality of the side link between the UE and the WD. And the deterioration trend of signal quality determines whether the UE and WD need to perform common handover.
  • the value of the second indication may be: 00, 01, 10, 11.
  • the second indication is used to indicate that the signal quality condition of the side link between the UE and the WD satisfies the condition of the common handover.
  • 01 represents that the signal quality of the side link is higher than the threshold, and the signal quality of the side link is deteriorating, and the second indication is used to indicate that the signal quality condition of the side link between the UE and the WD does not satisfy the condition of the common handover.
  • the 10 represents that the signal quality of the side link is lower than the threshold, and the signal quality of the side link is not deteriorating, and the second indication is used to indicate that the signal quality condition of the side link between the UE and the WD does not satisfy the condition of the common handover.
  • the second indication is used to indicate that the signal quality condition of the side link between the UE and the WD does not satisfy the condition of the common handover.
  • the second indication included in the first measurement report sent by the UE to the source base station is 00, that is, the signal strength of the side link is higher than the threshold, and the signal quality of the side link is not deteriorating, and is used to indicate the UE and The signal quality condition of the side link between the WDs satisfies the condition of the common handover.
  • the side link signal strength and the first indication, or the second indication may be obtained by the UE detecting the signal quality of the side link between the UE and the WD.
  • the UE may periodically measure the signal quality of the side link between the UE and the WD to obtain the side link signal strength and the first indication, or to obtain a second indication.
  • the UE may measure the signal quality of the side link between the UE and the WD once every 1 s (seconds).
  • the source base station sends second measurement control signaling to the WD.
  • the second measurement control signaling may include: a first measurement threshold and a third measurement threshold, where the first measurement threshold is used to determine whether the signal quality of the currently camped cell meets the service requirement of the WD, and the third measurement threshold is used for determining Whether the signal quality of the second neighboring cell included in the second neighboring cell group satisfies the service requirement of the WD, and the second neighboring cell group may include at least one second neighboring cell, where the second neighboring cell is A cell adjacent to the current camping cell of the WD.
  • the WD Since the WD is transmitting uplink and downlink signaling through a direct connection with the network, the WD can switch to another in time in order to move in the WD and the current camped cell cannot meet the service requirements of the WD due to the movement.
  • the source base station may send, in advance, a second measurement control signaling for determining whether the current camped cell and the cell adjacent to the currently camped cell satisfy the service requirement of the WD through a direct connection with the WD. .
  • the source base station may configure different measurement thresholds for each second neighboring cell included in the second neighboring cell group, or may be configured for all second neighboring cells included in the second neighboring cell group.
  • the same measurement threshold may be configured to configure the same measurement threshold for the second neighboring cell included in the second neighboring cell group, and the measurement threshold configured for the second neighboring cell in the second neighboring cell group.
  • the specific embodiment of the present invention is not limited herein, and may be set according to requirements of an actual application scenario.
  • the WD receives the second measurement control signaling sent by the source base station.
  • the WD sends a second measurement report to the source base station.
  • the WD After the WD receives the second measurement control signaling sent by the source base station, if the WD moves, the signal quality of the current camping cell and each second neighboring cell of the second neighboring cell group may be used. Signal quality is measured.
  • the WD determines that the signal quality of the current camping cell is lower than the first measurement threshold, that is, the signal quality of the current camping cell cannot meet the current service requirement, and determines that the second neighboring cell exists in the second neighboring cell group.
  • the signal quality is higher than the third measurement threshold, that is, when the signal quality of the second neighboring cell can meet the current service requirement, the WD can send the second measurement report to the source base station.
  • the second neighboring cell with the signal quality in the second neighboring cell group being higher than the third measurement threshold is included in the fourth neighboring cell group.
  • the second measurement report may include: a signal quality of a current camping cell obtained by the WD, a signal quality of each second neighboring cell in the fourth neighboring cell group, and The identifier, the side link signal strength, and the first indication; in the second possible implementation manner, the second measurement report may include: a signal quality of the current camping cell obtained by the WD measurement, and a fourth neighboring cell group Signal quality and identity of each second neighboring cell, and a second indication.
  • the second link report includes the side link signal strength and the first indication
  • the side link signal strength included in the second measurement report sent by the WD to the source base station is higher than a threshold, and the first indication is 0. Both are used to indicate that the signal quality condition of the side link between the UE and the WD satisfies the condition of the common handover.
  • the second indication included in the second measurement report for example, it is assumed that the second indication included in the second measurement report sent by the WD to the source base station is 00, that is, the signal quality of the side link is higher than the threshold, and the side link is The signal quality is not deteriorating and is used to indicate that the signal quality condition of the side link between the UE and the WD satisfies the condition of the common handover.
  • the side link signal strength and the first indication, or the second indication may be obtained by the WD detecting the signal quality of the side link between the UE and the WD.
  • the WD may periodically measure the signal quality of the side link between the UE and the WD to obtain the side link signal strength and the first indication, or to obtain a second indication.
  • the WD can measure the signal quality of the side link between the UE and the WD every 2 s (seconds).
  • step 501-step 503 has no relationship with the execution of step 504-step 506, that is, step 501-step 503 may be performed first, and then step 504-step 506 may be performed, or The steps 504 to 506 may be performed first, and then the steps 501 to 503 are performed.
  • the order of execution of the steps 501 to 503 and the steps 504 to 506 is not specifically limited.
  • the source base station receives the first measurement report sent by the UE, and receives the second measurement report sent by the WD.
  • the source base station determines, according to the first measurement report and the second measurement report, that the UE and the WD need to perform a common handover, and determine the target cell.
  • the target cell refers to a neighboring cell of the current camping cell to which the UE and the WD need to jointly switch.
  • the source base station may determine the current station measured by the UE included in the first measurement report. Whether the signal quality of the reserved cell is lower than the first measurement threshold, and determining whether the signal quality of each first neighboring cell in the third neighboring cell group included in the first measurement report is higher than the second measurement threshold.
  • the source base station can according to the side link signal strength and the first included in the first measurement report An indication of whether the signal quality condition of the side link between the UE and the WD satisfies the condition of the common handover, so that whether the UE and the WD can be determined according to whether the signal quality condition of the side link between the UE and the WD satisfies the condition of the common handover A common switch is required.
  • the source base station may determine the signal quality of the side link between the UE and the WD according to the side link signal strength included in the first measurement report being higher than a threshold, the first indication being 0.
  • the condition of the common handover is met.
  • the source base station can satisfy the condition of the common handover according to the obtained signal quality condition of the side link between the UE and the WD, and determine that the UE and the WD need to perform the common handover.
  • the source base station may determine the current station measured by the UE included in the first measurement report. Whether the signal quality of the staying cell is lower than the first measurement threshold.
  • the source base station may determine, according to the second indication included in the first measurement report, whether the signal quality condition of the side link between the UE and the WD satisfies a condition of common handover, so that the signal quality of the side link between the UE and the WD may be Whether the condition satisfies the condition of the common handover, and determines whether the UE and the WD need to perform a common handover.
  • the source base station may determine, according to the second indication 00 included in the first measurement report, that the signal quality of the side link is higher than the threshold, and the signal quality of the side link is not deteriorating, determining the UE.
  • the signal quality condition of the side link between the WD and the WD satisfies the condition of the common handover.
  • the source base station can satisfy the condition of the common handover according to the obtained signal quality condition of the side link between the UE and the WD, and determine that the UE and the WD need to perform the common handover.
  • the source base station may determine whether the signal quality of the current camping cell obtained by the WD measurement included in the second measurement report is lower than the first measurement threshold.
  • the signal quality of the current camping cell is lower than the first measurement threshold, and the signal quality of each second neighboring cell in the fourth neighboring cell group is higher than the third measurement threshold, and determining that the WD needs to be performed Switch.
  • the source base station may determine, according to the side link signal strength and the first indication included in the second measurement report, whether the signal quality condition of the side link between the UE and the WD satisfies the condition of the common handover, and thus may be based on the UE and the WD. Whether the signal quality condition of the side link satisfies the condition of the common handover, and determines whether the UE and the WD need to perform the common handover.
  • the source base station may determine the signal quality of the side link between the UE and the WD according to the side link signal strength included in the second measurement report being higher than a threshold, the first indication being 0.
  • the condition of the common handover is met.
  • the source base station can satisfy the condition of the common handover according to the obtained signal quality condition of the side link between the UE and the WD, and determine that the UE and the WD need to perform the common handover.
  • the source base station may determine the current station of the WD measurement included in the second measurement report. Whether the signal quality of the staying cell is lower than the first measurement threshold.
  • the signal quality of the current camping cell is lower than the first measurement threshold, and the signal quality of each second neighboring cell in the fourth neighboring cell group is higher than the third measurement threshold, and determining that the WD needs to be performed Switch.
  • the source base station may determine, according to the second indication included in the second measurement report, whether the signal quality condition of the side link between the UE and the WD satisfies the condition of the common handover, And whether the UE and the WD need to perform common handover can be determined according to whether the signal quality condition of the side link between the UE and the WD satisfies the condition of the common handover.
  • the source base station may determine, according to the second indication 00 included in the second measurement report, that the signal quality of the side link is higher than the threshold, and the signal quality of the side link is not deteriorating, determining the UE.
  • the signal quality condition of the side link between the WD and the WD satisfies the condition of the common handover.
  • the source base station can satisfy the condition of the common handover according to the obtained signal quality condition of the side link between the UE and the WD, and determine the UE and the WD.
  • a common switch is required.
  • the source base station may further perform the SLI included in the first measurement report.
  • a WD in which a common handover is required in the WD connected to the UE is determined.
  • the source base station may allocate, to the WD, a layer 2 ID (Layer 2 ID, L2 ID) for distinguishing the data packets of the WD and the UE according to the context of the WD. Moreover, the source base station allocates different L2 IDs for different WDs, and allocates an SLI for identifying a side link bearer between the UE and the WD, and also stores the correspondence between the L2 ID, the SLI, and the SLI and the L2 ID. Therefore, after the source base station receives the first measurement report sent by the UE, the source base station can determine the first measurement report by searching for the corresponding relationship between the saved SLI and the L2 ID according to the SLI included in the first measurement report. The L2ID corresponding to the SLI is included, thereby determining that the WD is connected to the UE, and specifically which WD needs to perform the common handover with the UE.
  • Layer 2 ID Layer 2 ID, L2 ID
  • the source base station may be configured according to the identifier of each first neighboring cell in the third neighboring cell group included in the first measurement report, and the second measurement report.
  • the identifier of each second neighboring cell in the fourth neighboring cell group determines the target cell.
  • the specific determining method may be: the source base station may perform the third according to the identifier of each first neighboring cell in the third neighboring cell group and the identifier of each second neighboring cell in the fourth neighboring cell group. A neighboring cell with the same identifier is selected as the candidate cell group in the neighboring cell group and the fourth neighboring cell group, and at least one device may be included in the candidate cell group. Selecting a cell, if the candidate cell group includes only one candidate cell, the source base station determines that the candidate cell is the target cell, and if the candidate cell group includes multiple candidate cells, the source base station may according to the first measurement report. The signal quality of each of the first neighboring cells in the third neighboring cell group is selected, and the neighboring cell with the best signal quality measured by the UE is selected from the candidate cell group as the target cell.
  • the SLI does not need to be included in the first measurement report, and the source base station does not need to perform an operation of determining which WD to perform the common handover with the UE according to the SLI, but determines the UE and After the WD needs to perform the common handover, the operation of determining the target cell is directly performed.
  • the source base station may determine, according to the previously received measurement report, whether the UE and the WD need to perform common handover. If it is determined that the UE and the WD need to perform the common handover, the source base station may determine whether another measurement report is received within the preset time period after determining that the UE and the WD need to perform the common handover.
  • step 509 is performed; if another measurement is not received within the preset time period Reporting, or receiving another measurement report within a preset time period, but determining that the UE and the WD do not need to perform a common handover according to another measurement report, it is determined that the UE and the WD do not need to perform a common handover.
  • the source base station sends a handover request to the target base station corresponding to the target cell.
  • the source base station determines, according to the first measurement report and the second measurement report, that the UE and the WD need to perform the common handover, and after determining the target cell, the source base station may send the handover request to the target base station corresponding to the target cell by using the X2 interface.
  • the handover request may include: a Relay Indicator, a UE Context Information, and a WD Context Information.
  • the relay indication is used to indicate that the target base station performs common handover between the UE and the WD.
  • the context of the UE may include: a first Radio Resource Control (RRC) context (a radio bearer ID may be included in the first RRC context) (Radio Bearer ID, RB ID)), the correspondence between the L2 ID, the SLI, the SLI, and the L2 ID, and the correspondence between the SLI and the RB ID, where the RB ID is the identifier of the DRB between the UE and the source base station, and the L2 ID is The source base station is an identifier assigned to the WD, and the SLI is an identifier of a side link between the WD and the UE.
  • the second RRC context may be included in the context of the WD, and the second RRC context may include an EBI, which is an identifier of an Evolved Packet System (EPS) carried between the WD and the core network.
  • EPS Evolved Packet System
  • the target base station receives a handover request sent by the source base station.
  • the target base station may receive the handover request sent by the source base station through the X2 interface.
  • the target base station multiplexes the context of the UE and the context of the WD according to the handover request, and allocates resources for transmitting service data, PC5 radio resources, and access resources.
  • the target base station may determine, according to the relay indication included in the handover request, that the WD and the UE need to jointly switch to the coverage of the UE, that is, the target cell. And the source base station may determine that the side link between the UE and the WD still exists according to the SLI included in the context of the UE, so that the PC5 radio resource required for the WD and the UE to update the side link between the WD and the UE may be allocated, PC5 refers to the interface between the UE and the WD.
  • the target base station may also directly multiplex the correspondence between the L2 ID, the SLI, the SLI, and the L2 ID included in the context of the UE and the correspondence between the SLI and the RB ID without re-generation.
  • the target base station may also allocate and reserve resources for transmitting the service data for the common handover of the UE and the WD according to the context of the UE and the WD of the handover request, and the target base station may allocate the access resource, where the access resource may include: The first identifier, the second identifier, the first preamble, and the second preamble.
  • the first identifier may be a first C-RNTI
  • the second identifier may be a second C-RNTI.
  • the first identifier is used to identify the UE, the first preamble is used for the UE to access the target base station, the second identifier is used to identify the WD, and the second preamble is used for the WD to access the target base station.
  • the target base station sends a handover request acknowledgement to the source base station.
  • the target base station may send a handover request acknowledgement to the source base station after the target base station multiplexes the context of the UE and the context of the WD according to the handover request, and allocates the resource for transmitting the service data, the PC5 radio resource, and the access resource.
  • Request Ack The handover request acknowledgement may include: a relay indication, a first handover command (Handover Command), and a second handover command, where the relay indication is used to notify the source base station, and the handover request is confirmed as a common handover for the UE and the WD.
  • the first switching command is included in the first information
  • the first information may be specifically a target to source transparent container
  • the second switching command is included in the second information
  • the second information may be a second target to source transparent container
  • the first switching command may include a first identifier, a first preamble (Preamble), and a PC5 radio resource
  • the second switching command may include a second identifier, and a second Preamble and PC5 radio resources.
  • the source base station receives the handover request acknowledgement sent by the target base station.
  • the source base station sends the first handover command included in the handover request acknowledgement to the UE.
  • the source base station may send the first handover command included in the handover request acknowledgement to the UE after the source base station receives the handover request acknowledgement sent by the target base station.
  • the source base station may carry the first handover command in an RRC Connection Reconfiguration to be sent to the UE.
  • the UE receives a first handover command sent by the source base station.
  • the UE disconnects from the source base station according to the first handover command, and accesses the target base station.
  • the UE may disconnect the connection with the source base station according to the first handover command, synchronize with the target base station, and according to the first preamble included in the first handover command. Accessing the target base station, and carrying the first identifier when accessing the target base station, so that the target base station determines that the target base station is the UE according to the first identifier, and determines the context of the UE according to the first identifier, and then according to step 511 The context of the UE in the UE establishes a DRB that satisfies the QoS with the UE.
  • the source base station sends the second handover command included in the handover request acknowledgement to the WD.
  • the source base station may send the second handover command included in the handover request acknowledgement to the WD after the source base station receives the handover request acknowledgement sent by the target base station.
  • the source base station may carry the second handover command in the RRC link reconfiguration and send it to WD.
  • the WD receives a second handover command sent by the source base station.
  • step 514-step 515 has no relationship with the execution of step 517-step 518, that is, after step 513 is performed, step 514-step 515 may be performed first, and then executed.
  • Step 517-Step 518, or Step 517-Step 518 may be performed first, and then Step 514-Step 515 is performed, and the execution order of Step 514-Step 515 and Step 517-Step 518 is not in this embodiment of the present invention. Make specific restrictions.
  • the WD disconnects from the source base station according to the second handover command, and accesses the target base station.
  • the WD may disconnect the connection with the source base station according to the second handover command, synchronize with the target base station, and according to the second preamble included in the second handover command. Accessing the target base station, and carrying the second identifier when accessing the target base station, so that the target base station determines that the access target base station is the WD according to the second identifier, and finds the context of the WD according to the second identifier, and then according to step 511 In the context of the WD, establish a direct connection to the WD.
  • the UE updates the side link resource according to the PC5 radio resource included in the first handover command.
  • the UE may update the side link resource according to the PC5 radio resource included in the first handover command, so as to successfully switch to the target cell.
  • the uplink data may be directly sent to the target base station, so that the target base station forwards the received uplink data to the S-GW, thereby completing the uplink data transmission.
  • the WD updates the side link resource according to the PC5 radio resource included in the second handover command.
  • the WD may update the side link resource according to the PC5 radio resource included in the second handover command, so as to successfully switch to the target cell.
  • the uplink data can be forwarded to the target base station by the UE, so that The target base station forwards the received uplink data to the S-GW, thereby completing the transmission of the uplink data.
  • step 516 and step 519 may be performed simultaneously, and step 520 and step 521 may be simultaneously performed. carried out.
  • the UE sends a first handover confirmation to the target base station.
  • the UE may send a first handover acknowledgement (Not for Handover Confirm) to notify the target base station that the handover has been successfully performed to the target cell.
  • a first handover acknowledgement (Not for Handover Confirm) to notify the target base station that the handover has been successfully performed to the target cell.
  • the target base station receives the first handover confirmation sent by the UE.
  • the target base station may determine, according to the received first handover acknowledgement, that the UE has successfully switched to the target cell.
  • the WD sends a second handover confirmation to the target base station.
  • the WD may send a second handover confirmation for notifying that the target cell has been successfully handed over to the target base station.
  • the target base station receives the second handover confirmation sent by the WD.
  • the target base station may determine, according to the received second handover acknowledgement, that the WD has successfully switched to the target cell.
  • step 522-step 523 has no relationship with the execution of step 524-step 525, that is, step 522-step 523 may be performed first, and then step 524-step 525 may be performed, or Steps 524 to 525 may be performed first, and then steps 522 to 523 are performed.
  • the order of execution of steps 522 to 523 and steps 524 to 525 is not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present invention.
  • step 501 - step 525 After performing step 501 - step 525, the uplink data channel of the UE and the target base station, and the uplink data channel of the WD and the target base station have been successfully established, but the downlink data channel has not been established yet, and the S-GW can only pass the source base station.
  • the downlink data is sent to the target base station, so that the target base station sends the downlink data to the UE and the WD.
  • the following steps may be performed. 526-Step 537:
  • the target base station sends a first path switching request to the MME.
  • the target base station may send a path switch request (Path Switch Request), that is, a first path switch request, to the MME.
  • the first path switching request may include: an identifier of the target base station, an EBI and a UE ID of the S1-U to be modified, where the target base station identifier may be a TEID, and the S1-U refers to between the target base station and the S-GW. connection.
  • the MME receives the first path switching request sent by the target base station.
  • the target base station sends a second path switching request to the MME.
  • the target base station may send a path conversion request of the WD, that is, a second path conversion request, the second path conversion request to the MME. It may include: TEID, EBI and WD ID of S1-U that need to be modified.
  • the MME receives a second path switching request sent by the target base station.
  • step 526-step 527 has no relationship with the execution of step 528-step 529, that is, step 526-step 527 may be performed first, then step 528-step 529 may be performed, or Step 528-step 529 may be performed first, and then step 526-step 527 is performed.
  • the order of execution of step 526-step 527 and step 528-step 529 is not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present invention.
  • the MME sends a modify bearer request to the S-GW according to the first path switching request and the second path switching request.
  • the modify bearer request may include: a TEID and an EBI of the S1-U to be modified.
  • the MME may carry the TEID included in the first path switching request and the second path switching request and the EBI of the S1-U to be modified.
  • the modified bearer request is sent to the S-GW.
  • the S-GW receives the modify bearer request sent by the MME, and modifies the bearer according to the modify bearer request.
  • the S-GW may determine the downlink data to be sent to the UE or the WD according to the TEID included in the modify bearer request, and the target base station needs to forward, instead of forwarding by the source base station, that is, When the SGW has downlink data to be sent to the UE or the WD, the downlink data is sent to the target base station.
  • the S-GW performs the modification of the bearer according to the EBI of the S1-U that needs to be modified according to the modified bearer request, and specifically, the physical channel that sends the downlink data may be modified, that is, the S-GW may use the first physical channel (the first physical channel)
  • the channel is a channel for the S-GW to send downlink data to the source base station, and is modified to be a second physical channel (the second physical channel is a channel for the S-GW to send downlink data to the target base station).
  • the S-GW sends a modify bearer reply to the MME.
  • the S-GW may send a Modify Bearer Response to the MME.
  • the MME receives the modified bearer reply sent by the S-GW.
  • the MME sends a path switch confirmation to the target base station.
  • the MME may send a path switch acknowledgement (Path Switch Ack) to the target base station.
  • Path Switch Ack path switch acknowledgement
  • the target base station receives a path conversion acknowledgement sent by the MME.
  • the target base station sends an Iu release command to the source base station.
  • the source base station receives an Iu release command sent by the target base station.
  • the source base station may release related resources of the UE and the WD after receiving the Iu Release Command sent by the target base station.
  • the source base station determines that the WD needs to perform handover, and determines that the WD and the UE need to perform common handover according to the signal quality indication obtained by the WD. And after determining, by the first target cell, the first handover target that includes the first relay indication, The first target base station is caused to perform a common handover operation on the WD and the UE according to the first relay indication.
  • the side link between the WD and the UE does not need to be disconnected, thereby When the WD is switched, there is no need to perform an operation of converting the indirect connection with the source base station into a direct connection with the source base station, thereby solving the problem of the power of the WD caused by the current base station performing the switching operation during the movement of the WD and the UE together.
  • the problem is serious, and the processing burden on the network side is aggravated.
  • a common handover is required, which ensures the accuracy of the WD and UE co-switching, and the source base station further reduces the first target by transmitting a first handover request including the context of the UE and the context of the WD to the first target base station.
  • the processing load of the base station is required, which ensures the accuracy of the WD and UE co-switching, and the source base station further reduces the first target by transmitting a first handover request including the context of the UE and the context of the WD to the first target base station.
  • FIG. 6 is a flowchart of another mobility management method according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the WD is indirectly connected to the network through the UE (where the UE and the WD are currently camped in the same cell), and is directly connected to the network, and the WD is directly connected to the network.
  • the UE and the WD move together, the current camped cell may not meet the service requirements of the WD.
  • the UE and the WD can jointly switch to another cell that can satisfy the service demand of the WD, so as to continue to provide services for the WD through the cell.
  • the method may include:
  • the source base station sends first measurement control signaling to the UE.
  • the first measurement control signaling may include: a first measurement threshold and a second measurement threshold.
  • the UE receives the first measurement control signaling sent by the source base station.
  • the UE sends a first measurement report to the source base station.
  • the first measurement report may include: SLI, a signal quality of a currently camped cell measured by the UE, and each first neighboring cell in the third neighboring cell group.
  • the first measurement report may include: SLI, the signal quality of the currently camped cell measured by the UE, Signal quality and identity of each of the first neighboring cells in the three adjacent cell groups, and a second indication.
  • the source base station sends second measurement control signaling to the WD.
  • the second measurement control signaling may include: a first measurement threshold and a third measurement threshold.
  • the WD receives the second measurement control signaling sent by the source base station.
  • the WD sends a second measurement report to the source base station.
  • the second measurement report may include: a signal quality of the currently camped cell obtained by the WD measurement, and a signal of each second neighboring cell in the fourth neighboring cell group.
  • step 601-step 603 has no relationship with the execution of step 604-step 606, that is, step 601-step 603 may be performed first, and then step 604-step 606 may be performed, or The steps 604 to 606 may be performed first, and then the steps 601 to 603 are performed.
  • the embodiment of the present invention does not specifically limit the execution order of the steps 601 to 603 and the steps 604 to 606.
  • the source base station receives the first measurement report sent by the UE, and receives the second measurement report sent by the WD.
  • the source base station determines, according to the first measurement report and the second measurement report, that the UE and the WD need to perform a common handover, and determine the target cell.
  • the source base station sends a first handover request to the target base station corresponding to the target cell.
  • the source base station determines, according to the first measurement report and the second measurement report, that the UE and the WD need to perform the common handover, and after determining the target cell, the source base station may send the UE to the target base station corresponding to the target cell by using the X2 interface.
  • the handover request may include: a relay indication and a context of the UE, where the context of the UE may include a first RRC context (the RB ID may be included in the first RRC context), and the L2 ID
  • the context of the UE may include a first RRC context (the RB ID may be included in the first RRC context)
  • the L2 ID The correspondence between the SLI, the SLI, and the L2 ID, and the correspondence between the SLI and the RB ID, where the RB ID is an identifier of the data radio bearer between the UE and the source base station, and the L2 ID is an identifier assigned by the source base station to the WD, and the SLI is WD and The identity of the side link between the UEs.
  • the target base station receives a first handover request sent by the source base station.
  • the target base station may receive the first handover request sent by the source base station through the X2 interface.
  • the source base station sends a second handover request to the target base station corresponding to the target cell.
  • the source base station determines, according to the first measurement report and the second measurement report, that the UE and the WD need to perform the common handover, and after determining the target cell, the source base station may send the WD handover request to the target base station corresponding to the target cell, That is, the second handover request may include: a relay indication and a context of the WD, the second RRC context may be included in the context of the WD, and the EBI may be included in the second RRC context, where the EBI is the WD and the core network.
  • the identity between the EPS bearers may include: a relay indication and a context of the WD, the second RRC context may be included in the context of the WD, and the EBI may be included in the second RRC context, where the EBI is the WD and the core network.
  • the target base station receives a second handover request sent by the source base station.
  • the target base station may receive the second handover request sent by the source base station through the X2 interface.
  • step 609-step 610 has no relationship with the execution of step 611-step 612, that is, after step 608 is performed, step 609-step 610 may be performed first, and then executed. Step 611 - step 612, or you may perform step 611 - step 612 first, and then perform step 609 - step 610.
  • the embodiment of the present invention does not perform the steps 609 - 610 and step 611 - step 612 Make specific restrictions.
  • the target base station multiplexes the context of the UE and the context of the WD according to the first handover request and the second handover request, and allocates resources for transmitting service data, PC5 radio resources, and access resources.
  • the access resource may include: a first identifier, a second identifier, a first preamble, and a second preamble.
  • the target base station sends a first handover request acknowledgement to the source base station.
  • the target base station may send the handover request confirmation of the UE to the source base station.
  • the first handover request acknowledgement may include: a relay indication and a first handover command, where the first handover command is included in the first information, and the first information may specifically be a first Target to source transparent container, the first
  • the handover command may include a first identifier, a first preamble, and a PC5 radio resource.
  • the source base station receives the first handover request acknowledgement sent by the target base station.
  • the target base station sends a second handover request acknowledgement to the source base station.
  • the target base station may send a handover request confirmation of the WD to the source base station. , that is, the second handover request confirmation.
  • the second handover request acknowledgement may include: a relay indication and a second handover command, where the second handover command is included in the second information, and the second information may specifically be a second Target to source transparent container, the second The second command, the second preamble, and the PC5 radio resource may be included in the handover command.
  • the source base station receives the second handover request acknowledgement sent by the target base station.
  • step 614-step 615 has no relationship with the execution of step 616-step 617, that is, after step 613 is performed, step 614-step 615 may be performed first, and then executed. Step 616-step 617, or you may perform step 616-step 617 first, and then perform step 614-step 615.
  • the embodiment of the present invention does not perform the steps 614-step 615 and step 616-step 617. Make specific restrictions.
  • the source base station sends the first handover command included in the first handover request acknowledgement to the UE.
  • the UE receives a first handover command sent by the source base station.
  • the UE disconnects from the source base station according to the first handover command, and accesses the target base station.
  • the source base station sends the second handover command included in the second handover request acknowledgement to the WD.
  • the WD receives a second handover command sent by the source base station.
  • step 618-step 619, and step Steps 621 - 622 are performed in a non-sequential manner, that is, steps 618 - 619 may be performed first, and then steps 621 - 622 may be performed. Alternatively, steps 621 - 622 may be performed first, and then steps 618 - 619 may be performed.
  • the embodiment of the present invention does not specifically limit the execution order of step 618-step 619 and step 621-step 622.
  • the WD disconnects from the source base station according to the second handover command, and accesses the target base station.
  • the UE updates the side link resource according to the PC5 radio resource included in the first handover command.
  • the WD updates the side link resource according to the PC5 radio resource included in the second handover command.
  • step 620 and step 623 may be performed simultaneously, and step 624 and step 625 may be simultaneously performed. carried out.
  • the UE sends a first handover confirmation to the target base station.
  • the target base station receives the first handover confirmation sent by the UE.
  • the WD sends a second handover confirmation to the target base station.
  • the target base station receives a second handover confirmation sent by the WD.
  • the uplink data channel of the UE and the target base station, and the uplink data channel of the WD and the target base station have been successfully established, but the downlink data channel has not been established yet, and the S-GW can only pass the source base station.
  • the downlink data is sent to the target base station, so that the target base station sends the downlink data to the UE and the WD.
  • the following steps 630-641 in order to enable the downlink data to be directly sent by the SGW to the target base station, the following steps 630-641:
  • step 626-step 627 has no relationship with the execution of step 628-step 629, that is, step 626-step 627 may be performed first, then step 628-step 629 may be performed, or Step 628-step 629 may be performed first, and then step 626-step 627 is performed.
  • the order of execution of steps 626-step 627 and step 628-step 629 is not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present invention.
  • the target base station sends a first path switching request to the MME.
  • the first path switching request may include: an identifier of the target base station, an EBI and a UE ID of the S1-U to be modified, the target base station identifier may be a TEID, and the S1-U refers to between the target base station and the S-GW. Connection.
  • the MME receives the first path switching request sent by the target base station.
  • the target base station sends a second path switching request to the MME.
  • the second path conversion request may include: a TEID, an EBI and a WD ID of the S1-U to be modified.
  • the MME receives a second path switching request sent by the target base station.
  • step 630-step 631 has no relationship with the execution of step 632-step 633, that is, step 630-step 631 may be performed first, then step 632-step 633 may be performed, or Step 632-step 633 may be performed first, and then step 630-step 631 is performed, and the order of execution of step 630-step 631 and step 632-step 633 is not specifically limited in this embodiment of the present invention.
  • the MME sends a modify bearer request to the S-GW according to the first path switching request and the second path switching request.
  • the modify bearer request may include: a TEID and an EBI of the S1-U to be modified.
  • the MME may carry the TEID included in the first path switching request and the second path switching request and the EBI of the S1-U to be modified.
  • the modified bearer request is sent to the S-GW.
  • the S-GW receives the modify bearer request sent by the MME, and modifies the bearer according to the modify bearer request.
  • the S-GW sends a modify bearer reply to the MME.
  • the MME receives the modified bearer reply sent by the S-GW.
  • the MME sends a path switch confirmation to the target base station.
  • the target base station receives a path conversion acknowledgement sent by the MME.
  • the target base station sends an Iu release command to the source base station.
  • the source base station receives an Iu release command sent by the target base station.
  • step 601 to step 641 in the embodiment of the present invention is described.
  • step 601 to step 641 in another embodiment reference may be made to the corresponding steps in steps 501 to 537 in another embodiment.
  • the detailed description of the embodiments of the present invention will not be repeated here.
  • the source base station determines that the WD needs to perform handover, and determines that the WD and the UE need to perform common handover according to the signal quality indication obtained by the WD. And after determining, by the first target cell, the first handover target that includes the first relay indication, The first target base station is caused to perform a common handover operation on the WD and the UE according to the first relay indication.
  • the side link between the WD and the UE does not need to be disconnected, so that when the WD performs handover, there is no need to perform an operation of converting the indirect connection with the source base station into a direct connection with the source base station, and further In the process of moving the WD and the UE together, the power consumption of the WD caused by the handover operation of the current base station is severe, and the processing load on the network side is aggravated.
  • a common handover is required, which ensures the accuracy of the WD and UE co-switching, and the source base station further reduces the first target by transmitting a first handover request including the context of the UE and the context of the WD to the first target base station.
  • the processing load of the base station is required, which ensures the accuracy of the WD and UE co-switching, and the source base station further reduces the first target by transmitting a first handover request including the context of the UE and the context of the WD to the first target base station.
  • FIG. 7 is a flowchart of another mobility management method according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the WD is indirectly connected to the network through the UE (where the UE and the WD are currently camped in the same cell), and is directly connected to the network, and the WD is connected.
  • the current camped cell may not meet the service requirements of the WD.
  • the WD can switch to another cell that can meet its business needs in order to continue to serve WD through the cell.
  • the method may include:
  • the source base station sends second measurement control signaling to the WD.
  • the second measurement control signaling may include: a first measurement threshold and a third measurement threshold.
  • the WD receives the second measurement control signaling sent by the source base station.
  • the WD sends a second measurement report to the source base station.
  • the signal quality of the current camping cell and each second neighboring cell of the second neighboring cell group may be used.
  • the signal quality is measured, and according to the first measurement threshold included in the received second measurement control signaling, determining whether the signal quality of the current camping cell meets the current service requirement, according to the third included in the second measurement control signaling.
  • the measurement threshold determines whether the signal quality of each second neighboring cell meets the current service requirement.
  • the WD determines that the signal quality of the currently camped cell is lower than the first measurement threshold, it indicates that the signal quality of the currently camped cell cannot meet the current The service requirement, and determining that the signal quality of the second neighboring cell in the second neighboring cell group is higher than the third measurement threshold, that is, when the signal quality of the second neighboring cell can meet the current service requirement, the WD A second measurement report can be sent to the source base station.
  • the second measurement report may include: a signal quality of a current camping cell obtained by the WD, a signal quality of each second neighboring cell in the fourth neighboring cell group, and The identifier, the side link signal strength, and the first indication; in the second possible implementation manner, the second measurement report may include: a signal quality of the current camping cell obtained by the WD measurement, and a fourth neighboring cell group Signal quality and identity of each second neighboring cell, and a second indication.
  • the specific description of the parameters included in the second measurement report is similar to the specific description of the parameters included in the first measurement report in step 503 in another embodiment of the present invention, and the parameters included in the second measurement report.
  • the embodiments of the present invention are not described herein again.
  • the side link signal included in the second measurement report sent by the WD to the source base station is assumed The strength is lower than the threshold, and the first indication is 1, both of which are used to indicate that the signal quality condition of the side link between the UE and the WD does not satisfy the condition of the common handover.
  • the second indication included in the second measurement report for example, it is assumed that the second indication included in the second measurement report sent by the WD to the source base station is 11, that is, the signal quality of the side link is lower than the threshold, and the side link is The signal quality is deteriorating, which is used to indicate that the signal quality condition of the side link between the UE and the WD does not satisfy the condition of the common handover.
  • the source base station receives a second measurement report sent by the WD.
  • the source base station determines, according to the second measurement report, that the WD needs to perform a separate handover, and deletes an association relationship between the UE and the WD, and determines the target cell.
  • the target cell refers to a neighboring cell of the currently camped cell to which the WD needs to be separately switched.
  • the source base station may determine the current station of the WD measurement included in the second measurement report.
  • the source base station may determine, according to the side link signal strength and the first indication included in the second measurement report, whether the signal quality condition of the side link between the UE and the WD satisfies the condition of the common handover, and thus may be based on the UE and the WD.
  • the source base station may determine the signal quality of the side link between the UE and the WD according to the side link signal strength included in the second measurement report being lower than a threshold, the first indication being 1. If the condition of the common handover is not satisfied, the source base station may determine that the WD needs to perform a separate handover according to the condition that the signal quality of the side link between the UE and the WD does not satisfy the common handover condition.
  • the source base station may determine the first Whether the signal quality of the current camping cell obtained by the WD measurement included in the second measurement report is lower than the first measurement threshold, and determining the second neighboring cell of the fourth neighboring cell group included in the second measurement report Whether the signal quality is higher than the third measurement threshold, and then the signal quality of the current camping cell obtained according to the judgment is lower than the first measurement threshold, and the signal quality of each second neighboring cell in the fourth neighboring cell group is higher than the first
  • the third measurement threshold determines that the WD needs to be switched, and the source base station can determine, according to the second indication included in the second measurement report, whether the signal quality of the side link between the UE and the WD meets the condition of the common handover, thereby It is determined whether the UE and the WD need to perform a common handover according to whether the signal quality condition of the side link between the UE and the WD satis
  • the source base station may be 11 according to the second indication included in the second measurement report, that is, the signal quality of the side link is lower than the threshold, and the signal quality of the side link is deteriorating, and determining the UE The signal quality condition of the side link between the WD and the WD does not satisfy the condition of the common handover.
  • the source base station can determine that the WD needs to perform a separate handover according to the condition that the obtained signal quality of the side link between the UE and the WD does not satisfy the common handover condition.
  • the source base station may determine that the UE and the WD are required to disconnect the side link between the two. Further, the source base station determines that the UE and the WD need to be separately sent. The indication information is used to indicate that the side link between the UE and the WD is disconnected. The source base station may delete the association relationship between the UE and the WD, specifically, the correspondence between the SLI, the L2 ID, the SLI, and the L2 ID included in the context of the UE, and the correspondence between the SLI and the RB ID, and the WD in the context of the UE.
  • the WD is the ID of the device that accepts the UE relay
  • the ID of the UE (the UE is the device that provides the relay service for the WD) in the context of the WD may also be deleted.
  • the source base station may further select, according to the signal quality and identifier of each second neighboring cell in the fourth neighboring cell group included in the second measurement report, the signal quality obtained by selecting the WD measurement from the fourth neighboring cell group.
  • a good neighbor cell is used as the target cell in order to switch the WD to the target cell separately.
  • the source base station sends a second handover request to the target base station corresponding to the target cell.
  • the source base station may send a second handover request to the target base station corresponding to the target cell by using the X2 interface, where the second handover request may include: Context, the second RRC context may be included in the context of the WD, and the second RRC context may include an EBI, which is an identifier of an EPS bearer between the WD and the core network.
  • the target base station receives a second handover request sent by the source base station.
  • the target base station may receive the second handover request sent by the source base station through the X2 interface.
  • the target base station allocates a new DRB related resource to the WD according to the second handover request, and allocates the access resource and the resource for transmitting the service data.
  • the target base station may allocate a new DRB related resource to the WD after the target base station receives the second handover request sent by the source base station, because the second RRC context included in the second handover request does not have the related resources of the DRB.
  • the access resource may be allocated, the access resource may include: a second identifier and a second preamble, and the target base station may allocate and reserve the transmission service data for the individual handover of the WD according to the context of the WD included in the second handover request. Resources.
  • the target base station sends a second handover request acknowledgement to the source base station.
  • the second handover request acknowledgement may include a second handover command, where the second handover command may include a second identifier and a second preamble.
  • the source base station receives a second handover request acknowledgement sent by the target base station.
  • the source base station sends a second RRC link reconfiguration to the WD.
  • the source base station may carry the second handover command included in the second handover request acknowledgement and the indication information in step 705 together in the second RRC. Send to WD in link reconfiguration.
  • the WD receives a second RRC link reconfiguration sent by the source base station.
  • the WD re-disconnects the connection with the UE according to the second RRC link, deletes the correspondence between the EBI and the SLI, disconnects the connection with the source base station, and accesses the target base station.
  • the WD may disconnect the UE according to the indication information included in the second RRC link reconfiguration. And deleting the correspondence between the EBI and the SLI, and disconnecting from the source base station according to the second handover command, synchronizing with the target base station, and accessing the target base station according to the second preamble included in the second handover command, And the second identifier is carried when the target base station is accessed, so that the target base station determines that the access target base station is the WD according to the second identifier, and establishes the target base station according to the new DRB related resource allocated for the WD in step 708. DRB between WD.
  • the WD sends a second handover confirmation to the target base station.
  • the target base station receives a second handover confirmation sent by the WD.
  • step 701-step 715 the uplink data channel of the WD and the target base station has been successfully established, but the downlink data channel has not been established yet, and the S-GW can only send the downlink data to the target base station through the source base station, so that the target base station can be used.
  • the downlink data is sent to the WD.
  • steps 716-step 726 may be performed:
  • the target base station sends a second path switching request to the MME.
  • the target base station may send a path conversion request of the WD, that is, a second path conversion request, the second path conversion request to the MME. It may include: TEID, EBI of the S1-U to be modified, WD ID, and Direct Path Switch Indicator.
  • the direct path transition indication is used to inform the MME that the WD has disconnected from the UE.
  • the MME receives a second path switching request sent by the target base station.
  • the MME deletes the WD ID in the context of the UE and the UE ID in the context of the WD according to the second path conversion request.
  • the MME may delete the WD in the context of the UE according to the direct path switching indication included in the second path switching request.
  • the ID of the may also delete the ID of the UE (the UE is a device that provides relay service for the WD) in the context of the WD.
  • the MME sends a modified bearer to the S-GW according to the second path switching request. begging.
  • the modify bearer request may include: a TEID and an EBI of the S1-U to be modified.
  • the MME may use the TEID included in the second path switching request and the EBI of the S1-U to be modified.
  • the bearer is sent to the S-GW in the modify bearer request.
  • the S-GW receives the modify bearer request sent by the MME, and modifies the bearer according to the modify bearer request.
  • the downlink data to be sent to the WD may be determined according to the TEID included in the modified bearer request, and the target base station needs to be forwarded instead of the source base station, that is, when the SGW is used.
  • the downlink data is sent to the target base station.
  • the S-GW performs the modification of the bearer according to the EBI of the S1-U that needs to be modified according to the modified bearer request, and specifically, the physical channel that sends the downlink data may be modified, that is, the S-GW may use the first physical channel (the first physical channel)
  • the channel is a channel for the S-GW to send downlink data to the source base station, and is modified to be a second physical channel (the second physical channel is a channel for the S-GW to send downlink data to the target base station).
  • the S-GW sends a modify bearer reply to the MME.
  • the S-GW may send a modify bearer reply to the MME.
  • the MME receives the modified bearer reply sent by the S-GW.
  • the MME sends a path switch confirmation to the target base station.
  • the target base station receives a path conversion acknowledgement sent by the MME.
  • the target base station sends an Iu release command to the source base station.
  • the source base station receives an Iu release command sent by the target base station.
  • the source base station may release the related resources of the WD according to the Iu release command.
  • the source base station sends a first RRC link reconfiguration to the UE.
  • the source base station may step The indication information and the configuration parameter carried in step 705 are sent to the UE in a first RRC link reconfiguration, where the configuration parameter is used by the UE to restore the connection configuration between the UE and the source base station before the UE is the WD relay. Connection configuration.
  • the UE receives the first RRC link reconfiguration sent by the source base station.
  • the UE re-allocates according to the first RRC link, disconnects the connection with the WD, deletes the correspondence between the SLI and the L2 ID, and the correspondence between the SLI and the RB ID.
  • the UE may disconnect the WD according to the indication information included in the first RRC link reconfiguration, and delete the correspondence between the SLI and the L2 ID and Correspondence between SLI and RB ID.
  • the UE may also restore the connection configuration between itself and the source base station to the connection configuration before the WD relay according to the configuration parameters included in the first RRC link reconfiguration.
  • the UE sends an RRC link reconfiguration complete to the source base station.
  • the UE may send the RRC link reconfiguration to the source base station. (RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete).
  • the source base station receives the RRC link reconfiguration completed by the UE.
  • the source base station may release the side link resource after receiving the RRC link reconfiguration sent by the UE.
  • steps 701 to 731 in the embodiment of the present invention is similar to the specific description of the corresponding steps in the steps 501 to 537 in another embodiment of the present invention, and steps 701 to 731 in the embodiment of the present invention.
  • steps 701 to 731 in the embodiment of the present invention are not described herein again.
  • the source base station may determine, according to the received second measurement report, that the WD needs to perform handover, and determine, according to the signal quality indication obtained by the WD, that the WD needs to perform separate handover, and may determine the WD.
  • a second handover request including the context of the WD is transmitted to the second target base station corresponding to the second target cell. Due to WD When switching separately, there is no need to perform an operation of converting the indirect connection with the source base station into a direct connection with the source base station, thereby solving the problem that the power consumption of the WD is severe and the processing load on the network side is aggravated.
  • FIG. 8 is a flowchart of another mobility management method according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the WD is indirectly connected to the network through the UE (where the UE and the WD are currently camped in the same cell), and is directly connected to the network, and the WD is directly connected to the network.
  • the service is currently being transmitted, if the UE and the WD move together, the current camped cell may not meet the service requirement of the UE. In this case, in order to ensure the continuity of the UE, the UE may switch to another. A cell that meets its service needs to continue to provide services to the UE through the cell.
  • the method may include:
  • the source base station sends first measurement control signaling to the UE.
  • the first measurement control signaling may include: a first measurement threshold and a second measurement threshold.
  • the UE receives the first measurement control signaling sent by the source base station.
  • the UE sends a first measurement report to the source base station.
  • the signal quality of the current camping cell and each first neighboring cell in the first neighboring cell group may be used.
  • the signal quality is measured, and determining, according to the first measurement threshold included in the received first measurement control signaling, whether the signal quality of the current camping cell meets the current service requirement, according to the second included in the first measurement control signaling.
  • the measurement threshold determines whether the signal quality of each first neighboring cell meets the current service requirement.
  • the UE determines that the signal quality of the current camping cell is lower than the first measurement threshold, it indicates that the signal quality of the currently camped cell cannot meet the current The service requirement, and determining that the signal quality of the first neighboring cell in the first neighboring cell group is higher than the second measurement threshold, that is, when the signal quality of the first neighboring cell can meet the current service requirement, the UE The first measurement report can be sent to the source base station.
  • the first measurement report may include: SLI, a signal quality of the currently camped cell measured by the UE, and a signal of each first neighboring cell in the third neighboring cell group. Quality and identity, side link signal strength, and An indication is that, in the second possible implementation, the first measurement report may include: SLI, a signal quality of the currently camped cell measured by the UE, and each first neighbor in the third neighboring cell group. The signal quality and identity of the cell, as well as the second indication.
  • the specific description of the parameters included in the first measurement report is similar to the specific description of the parameters included in the first measurement report in step 503 in another embodiment of the present invention, for the parameters included in the first measurement report.
  • the embodiments of the present invention are not described herein again.
  • the first measurement report includes the side link signal strength and the first indication
  • the side link signal strength included in the first measurement report sent by the UE to the source base station is lower than a threshold, and the first indication is 1,
  • the two are used to indicate that the signal quality condition of the side link between the UE and the WD does not satisfy the condition of the common handover, and determines that the UE needs to be performed according to the condition that the signal quality of the side link between the UE and the WD does not satisfy the condition of the common handover. Switch separately.
  • the second indication included in the first measurement report for example, it is assumed that the second indication included in the first measurement report sent by the UE to the source base station is 11, that is, the signal quality of the side link is lower than the threshold, and the side link is The signal quality is deteriorating, which is used to indicate that the signal quality condition of the side link between the UE and the WD does not satisfy the condition of the common handover.
  • the source base station receives the first measurement report sent by the UE.
  • the source base station determines, according to the first measurement report, that the UE needs to perform a separate handover, deletes an association relationship between the UE and the WD, allocates a new DRB-related resource to the WD, and determines the target cell.
  • the target cell refers to a neighboring cell of the currently camped cell to which the UE needs to be separately switched.
  • the source base station may determine the current station measured by the UE included in the first measurement report.
  • the source base station may according to the strength of the side link signal included in the first measurement report.
  • the source base station may determine the signal quality of the side link between the UE and the WD according to the side link signal strength included in the first measurement report being lower than a threshold, the first indication being 1. If the condition of the common handover is not satisfied, the source base station may determine that the UE needs to perform a separate handover according to the condition that the signal quality of the side link between the UE and the WD does not satisfy the common handover condition.
  • the source base station may determine the current station measured by the UE included in the first measurement report. Whether the signal quality of the reserved cell is lower than the first measurement threshold, and determining whether the signal quality of each first neighboring cell in the third neighboring cell group included in the first measurement report is higher than the second measurement threshold, and then according to Determining that the signal quality of the currently camped cell is lower than the first measurement threshold, and the signal quality of each first neighboring cell in the third neighboring cell group is higher than the second measurement threshold, and determining that the UE needs to perform handover, And the source base station may determine, according to the second indication included in the first measurement report, whether the signal quality condition of the side link between the UE and the WD satisfies a condition of common handover, so that the signal quality of the side link between the UE and the WD may be Whether the condition satisfies the condition of the common handover
  • the source base station may be 11 according to the second indication included in the first measurement report, that is, the signal quality of the side link is lower than the threshold, and the signal quality of the side link is deteriorating, and the UE is determined.
  • the signal quality condition of the side link between the WD and the WD does not satisfy the condition of the common handover.
  • the source base station can determine the UE according to the condition that the obtained signal quality of the side link between the UE and the WD does not satisfy the common handover condition. A separate switch is required.
  • the source base station may determine that the UE and the WD need to be disconnected from the side link. Further, the source base station determines that it is necessary to separately send an indication message to the UE and the WD for indicating that the side link between the UE and the WD is disconnected. The source base station may delete the association relationship between the UE and the WD, specifically, the correspondence between the SLI, the L2 ID, the SLI, and the L2 ID included in the context of the UE, and the correspondence between the SLI and the RB ID, and the WD in the context of the UE.
  • the WD is the ID of the device that accepts the UE relay
  • the ID of the UE (the UE is the device that provides the relay service for the WD) in the context of the WD may also be deleted.
  • the source base station may further allocate a new DRB related resource to the WD, and according to the signal quality and identifier of each first neighboring cell in the third neighboring cell group included in the first measurement report, from the third neighboring cell group.
  • the neighboring cell with the best signal quality measured by the UE is selected as the target cell, so as to switch the UE to the target cell separately.
  • the source base station sends a first handover request to the target base station corresponding to the target cell.
  • the source base station determines, according to the first measurement report, that the UE needs to perform a separate handover, deletes the association relationship between the UE and the WD, allocates a new DRB-related configuration to the WD, and after determining the target cell, the source base station may
  • the first handover request is sent to the target base station corresponding to the target cell by using the X2 interface, where the first handover request may include: a context of the UE, where the context of the UE may include the first RRC context.
  • the target base station receives the first handover request sent by the source base station.
  • the target base station may receive the handover request sent by the source base station through the X2 interface.
  • the target base station allocates resources for accessing resources and transmitting service data according to the first handover request.
  • the target base station may be configured after the target base station receives the first handover request sent by the source base station, because the correspondence between the SLI and the L2 ID and the correspondence between the SLI and the RB ID are not included in the context of the UE included in the first handover request. Determining the handover is a separate handover of the UE, and the access resource may be allocated.
  • the access resource may include: a first identifier and a first preamble, and the target base station may be configured according to a context of the UE included in the first handover request.
  • a separate handover of the UE allocates and reserves resources for transmitting service data.
  • the target base station sends a first handover request acknowledgement to the source base station.
  • the first switching request acknowledgement may include a first switching command, where the first cut The first identifier and the first preamble may be included in the change command.
  • the source base station receives the first handover request acknowledgement sent by the target base station.
  • the source base station sends a first RRC link reconfiguration to the UE.
  • the source base station may carry the first handover command included in the first handover request acknowledgement and the indication information in step 805 together in the first RRC. Send to the UE in the link reconfiguration.
  • the UE receives the first RRC link reconfiguration sent by the source base station.
  • the source base station sends a second RRC link reconfiguration to the WD.
  • the source base station may carry the indication information described in step 805 in the second RRC link reconfiguration to be sent to the WD.
  • the WD receives a second RRC link reconfiguration sent by the source base station.
  • step 811-step 812 has no relationship with the execution of step 813-step 814, that is, after step 810 is performed, step 811-step 812 may be performed first, and then executed.
  • Step 813-Step 814, or Step 813-Step 814 may be performed first, and then Step 811-Step 812 is performed, and the execution order of Step 811-Step 812 and Step 813-Step 814 is not in this embodiment of the present invention. Make specific restrictions.
  • the WD reconnects according to the second RRC link, disconnects the UE, and deletes the correspondence between the EBI and the SLI, and establishes a DRB between the WD and the source base station.
  • the WD may disconnect the UE according to the indication information included in the second RRC link reconfiguration, and delete the correspondence between the EBI and the SLI.
  • the WD may also be configured according to the new DRB related resource allocated for the WD in step 805 (the new DRB related resource allocated for the WD in step 805 may be carried by the source base station to the second RRC connection reconfiguration and sent to the WD),
  • the DRB between the WD and the source base station is established such that the connection configuration between the WD and the source base station is restored to the connection configuration before the WD accepts the UE relay.
  • the WD sends an RRC link reconfiguration complete to the source base station.
  • the connection with the UE is disconnected, and the correspondence between the EBI and the SLI is deleted, and the DRB between the WD and the source base station is established. Thereafter, the WD may send an RRC Link Reconfiguration Complete to the source base station.
  • the source base station receives the RRC link reconfiguration sent by the WD.
  • the source base station may release the side link resource after receiving the RRC link reconfiguration sent by the WD.
  • the UE disconnects from the WD according to the first RRC link reconfiguration, deletes the correspondence between the SLI and the L2 ID, and the correspondence between the SLI and the RB ID, and disconnects the source base station and accesses the target base station.
  • the UE may disconnect the WD according to the indication information included in the first RRC link reconfiguration, and delete the Corresponding relationship between the SLI and the L2 ID and the correspondence between the SLI and the RB ID, and disconnecting from the source base station according to the first handover command, synchronizing with the target base station, and according to the first preamble included in the first handover command Accessing the target base station, and carrying the first identifier when accessing the target base station, so that the target base station determines that the target base station is the UE according to the first identifier, and establishes a target according to the context of the UE included in the first handover request.
  • the UE sends a first handover confirmation to the target base station.
  • the target base station receives the first handover confirmation sent by the UE.
  • the uplink data channel of the UE and the target base station is successfully established, but the downlink data channel has not been established yet, and the S-GW can only send the downlink data to the target base station through the source base station, so that the target base station can be used.
  • the downlink data is sent to the UE.
  • the following steps 821 - 831 may be performed:
  • the target base station sends a first path switching request to the MME.
  • the target base station may send a path conversion request of the UE, that is, a first path conversion request, the first path conversion request, to the MME.
  • the information may include: TEID, EBI of the S1-U to be modified, UE ID, and direct path conversion indication.
  • the direct path transition indication is used to inform the MME that the UE has disconnected from the WD.
  • the MME receives a first path switching request sent by the target base station.
  • the MME deletes the WD ID in the context of the UE and the UE ID in the context of the WD according to the first path conversion request.
  • the MME may delete the WD in the context of the UE according to the direct path switching indication included in the first path switching request.
  • the ID of the may also delete the ID of the UE (the UE is a device that provides relay service for the WD) in the context of the WD.
  • the MME sends a modify bearer request to the S-GW according to the first path switching request.
  • the modify bearer request may include: a TEID and an EBI of the S1-U to be modified.
  • the MME may use the TEID included in the first path switching request and the EBI of the S1-U to be modified.
  • the bearer is sent to the S-GW in the modify bearer request.
  • the S-GW receives the modify bearer request sent by the MME, and modifies the bearer according to the modify bearer request.
  • the downlink data to be sent to the UE may be determined according to the TEID included in the modify bearer request, and the target base station needs to forward, instead, the source base station forwards, that is, when the SGW When downlink data needs to be sent to the UE, the downlink data is sent to the target base station.
  • the S-GW performs the modification of the bearer according to the EBI of the S1-U that needs to be modified according to the modified bearer request, and specifically, the physical channel that sends the downlink data may be modified, that is, the S-GW may use the first physical channel (the first physical channel)
  • the channel is a channel for the S-GW to send downlink data to the source base station, and is modified to be a second physical channel (the second physical channel is a channel for the S-GW to send downlink data to the target base station).
  • the S-GW sends a modify bearer reply to the MME.
  • the S-GW may send a modify bearer reply to the MME.
  • the MME receives the modified bearer reply sent by the S-GW.
  • the MME sends a path switch confirmation to the target base station.
  • the target base station receives a path conversion acknowledgement sent by the MME.
  • the target base station sends an Iu release command to the source base station.
  • the source base station receives an Iu release command sent by the target base station.
  • the source base station may release the related resources of the UE according to the Iu release command.
  • steps 801 to 831 in the embodiment of the present invention is similar to the specific description of the corresponding steps in the step 501 to the step 537 in another embodiment of the present invention.
  • steps 801 to the step 831 in the embodiment of the present invention For a detailed description, refer to the detailed description of the corresponding steps in the steps 501 to 537 in another embodiment, and the embodiments of the present invention are not described herein again.
  • each network element such as a source base station, a target base station, and a WD
  • each network element includes hardware structures and/or software modules corresponding to each function.
  • the present invention can be implemented in a combination of hardware or hardware and computer software in combination with the algorithm steps of the various examples described in the embodiments disclosed herein. Whether a function is implemented in hardware or computer software to drive hardware depends on the specific application and design constraints of the solution. A person skilled in the art can use different methods for implementing the described functions for each particular application, but such implementation should not be considered to be beyond the scope of the present invention.
  • the embodiments of the present invention may divide the function modules of the source base station, the target base station, and the WD according to the foregoing method example.
  • each function module may be divided according to each function, or two or more functions may be integrated into one processing module.
  • the above integrated modules can be implemented in the form of hardware or in the form of software functional modules. It should be noted that the division of the module in the embodiment of the present invention is schematic, and is only a logical function division, and the actual implementation may have another division manner.
  • FIG. 9 shows a possible composition diagram of the source base station involved in the above and the embodiments, as shown in FIG.
  • the source base station may include: a receiving unit 91, a determining unit 92, and a transmitting unit 93.
  • the receiving unit 91 is configured to support the source base station to perform step 403 in the mobility management method shown in FIG. 4, step 507, step 513, and step 537 in the mobility management method shown in FIG. Step 607, step 615, step 617, step 641 in the mobility management method, step 704, step 710, step 726, step 731 in the mobility management method shown in FIG. 7, mobility management shown in FIG. Step 804, step 810, step 817, and step 831 in the method.
  • the determining unit 92 is configured to support the source base station to perform step 404 in the mobility management method shown in FIG. 4, step 508 in the mobility management method shown in FIG. 5, and steps in the mobility management method shown in FIG. 608.
  • the determining WD in step 705 of the mobility management method shown in FIG. 7 needs to be separately switched, and determining the target cell, and determining that the UE needs to be separately switched according to step 805 in the mobility management method shown in FIG. And determine the target cell.
  • the sending unit 93 is configured to support the source base station to perform step 405 in the mobility management method shown in FIG. 4, step 501, step 504, step 509, step 514, and step 517 in the mobility management method shown in FIG. Step 601, step 604, step 609, step 611, step 618, step 621 in the mobility management method shown in FIG. 6, step 701, step 706, step 711, and step in the mobility management method shown in FIG. 727, step 801, step 806, step 811, and step 813 in the mobility management method shown in FIG.
  • the source base station provided by the embodiment of the present invention is configured to execute the mobility management method described above, so that the same effect as the mobility management method described above can be achieved.
  • FIG. 10 shows another possible composition diagram of the source base station involved in the above embodiment.
  • the source base station includes a processing module 1001 and a communication module 1002.
  • the processing module 1001 is configured to perform control and management on the action of the source base station.
  • the processing module 1001 is configured to support the source base station to perform step 404 in FIG. 4 and step 508 in FIG.
  • the determining WD according to step 705 in FIG. 7 needs to be separately switched, and the target cell is determined.
  • the determining UE according to step 805 in FIG. 8 needs to perform separate handover, and determines the target cell, and/or Other processes for the techniques described herein.
  • the communication module 1002 is configured to support communication of the source base station with other network entities, such as communication with or between the network entities illustrated in FIG. 1 or 3.
  • the communication module 1002 is configured to support the source base station to perform step 403 and step 405 in FIG.
  • the source base station may further include a storage module 1003 for storing program codes and data of the source base station.
  • the processing module 1001 can be a processor or a controller. It is possible to implement or carry out the various illustrative logical blocks, modules and circuits described in connection with the present disclosure.
  • the processor may also be a combination of computing functions, for example, including one or more microprocessor combinations, a combination of a DSP and a microprocessor, and the like.
  • the communication module 1002 can be a transceiver, a transceiver circuit, a communication interface, or the like.
  • the storage module 1003 can be a memory.
  • the source base station may be the source base station shown in FIG. 2.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing a possible composition of the target base station involved in the foregoing embodiment.
  • the target base station may include: receiving unit 1101. And switching unit 1102.
  • the receiving unit 1101 is configured to support the target base station to perform step 406 in the mobility management method shown in FIG. 4, and step 510, step 523, step 525, and step 535 in the mobility management method shown in FIG. Step 610, step 612, step 627, step 629, and step 639 in the mobility management method shown in FIG. 6, step 707, step 715, and step 724 in the mobility management method shown in FIG. Mobile Step 807, step 820, and step 829 in the sex management method.
  • the switching unit 1102 is configured to support the target base station to perform step 407 in the mobility management method shown in FIG. 4.
  • the target base station may further include: an allocating unit 1103 and a sending unit 1104.
  • the allocating unit 1103 is configured to support the target base station to perform the resource, the PC5 radio resource and the access resource for allocating the transport service data described in step 511 in the mobility management method shown in FIG. 5, and the mobility management shown in FIG. In the method of step 613, the resource for transmitting the service data, the PC5 radio resource and the access resource, the step 708 in the mobility management method shown in FIG. 7, and the step in the mobility management method shown in FIG. 808.
  • the sending unit 1104 is configured to support the target base station to perform step 512, step 528, and step 536 in the mobility management method shown in FIG. 5, and step 614, step 616, and step 632 in the mobility management method shown in FIG. Step 640, step 709, step 716, step 725 in the mobility management method shown in FIG. 7, step 809, step 821, and step 830 in the mobility management method shown in FIG.
  • the target base station provided by the embodiment of the present invention is configured to execute the mobility management method described above, so that the same effect as the mobility management method described above can be achieved.
  • FIG. 13 shows another possible composition diagram of the target base station involved in the above embodiment.
  • the target base station includes: a processing module 1201 and a communication module 1202.
  • the processing module 1201 is configured to perform control and management on the action of the target base station.
  • the processing module 1201 is configured to support the target base station to perform the resource, the PC5 radio resource, and the access resource for allocating the transport service data, as described in step 511 in FIG. 5, The resource for allocating the service data, the PC5 radio resource, and the access resource described in step 613 of the mobility management method shown in FIG. 7, step 708 in the mobility management method shown in FIG. 7, shown in FIG. Step 808 in the mobility management method, and/or for the techniques described herein Other processes.
  • the communication module 1202 is configured to support communication of the target base station with other network entities, such as communication with or between the network entities illustrated in FIG. 1 or 3.
  • the communication module 1202 is configured to support the target base station to perform step 406 in FIG. 4, step 510, step 512, step 523, step 525, step 528, step 535, step 536 in FIG. 5, step 610 in FIG. Step 612, step 614, step 616, step 627, step 629, step 632, step 639, step 640, step 707, step 709, step 715, step 716, step 724, step 725 in FIG. Step 807, step 809, step 820, step 821, step 829, step 830.
  • the target base station may further include a storage module 1203 for storing program codes and data of the source base station.
  • the processing module 1201 can be a processor or a controller. It is possible to implement or carry out the various illustrative logical blocks, modules and circuits described in connection with the present disclosure.
  • the processor may also be a combination of computing functions, for example, including one or more microprocessor combinations, a combination of a DSP and a microprocessor, and the like.
  • the communication module 1202 can be a transceiver, a transceiver circuit, a communication interface, or the like.
  • the storage module 1203 may be a memory.
  • the processing module 1201 is a processor
  • the communication module 1202 is a transceiver
  • the storage module 1203 is a memory
  • the source base station according to the embodiment of the present invention may be the target base station shown in FIG. 2.
  • FIG. 14 shows a possible composition diagram of the WD involved in the above and the embodiments, as shown in FIG. 14.
  • the WD may include: a measurement unit 1301, and a transmission unit.
  • the measuring unit 1301 is configured to support the WD to perform step 401 in the mobility management method shown in FIG. 4.
  • the sending unit 1302 is configured to support the WD to perform step 402 in the mobility management method shown in FIG. 4, step 506 and step 524 in the mobility management method shown in FIG. 5, and the mobility management method shown in FIG. Step 606, step 628, step 703 and step 714 in the mobility management method shown in FIG. 7, and step 816 in the mobility management method shown in FIG.
  • the receiving unit 1303 is configured to support the WD to perform the steps 504 and 518 in the mobility management method shown in FIG. 5, the steps 605 and 622 in the mobility management method shown in FIG. 6, and the mobility shown in FIG. Step 702, step 712 in the management method, and step 814 in the mobility management method shown in FIG.
  • the access unit 1304 is configured to support the WD to perform the access target base station described in step 519 of the mobility management method shown in FIG. 5, and the access target described in step 623 in the mobility management method shown in FIG.
  • the updating unit 1305 is configured to support the WD to perform step 521 in the mobility management method shown in FIG. 5 and step 625 in the mobility management method shown in FIG. 6.
  • the WD may further include: a disconnecting unit 1306 and an obtaining unit 1307.
  • the disconnecting unit 1306 is configured to support the WD to perform the disconnection from the source base station as described in step 519 of the mobility management method shown in FIG. 5, as described in step 623 in the mobility management method shown in FIG. Disconnecting from the source base station, disconnecting from the source base station as described in step 713 of the mobility management method shown in FIG. 7, disconnecting as described in step 815 in the mobility management method shown in FIG. The connection with the UE, the access target base station described in step 818.
  • the obtaining unit 1307 is configured to support the WD to perform the acquisition side link signal strength and the first indication or the second indication in the mobility management method shown in FIG. 5-8.
  • the WD provided by the embodiment of the present invention is used to execute the above mobility management method, and thus the same effect as the mobility management method described above can be achieved.
  • FIG. 16 shows another possible composition diagram of the WD involved in the above embodiment.
  • the WD includes a processing module 1401 and a communication module 1402.
  • the processing module 1401 is configured to control and manage the action of the WD, for example, processing the module
  • the block 1401 is configured to support the WD to perform the disconnection with the source base station as described in step 401 of FIG. 4, the step 519 in FIG. 5, access the target base station, step 521, and the access as described in step 623 in FIG.
  • Communication module 1402 is used to support communication of WDs with other network entities, such as with network entities shown in FIG. 1 or FIG.
  • the communication module 1402 is configured to support the WD to perform step 402 in FIG. 4, step 504, step 506, step 518, step 524 in FIG. 5, step 605, step 606, step 622, step 628 in FIG. Step 702, step 703, step 712, and step 714 in the mobility management method shown in FIG. 7, step 814 and step 816 in the mobility management method shown in FIG.
  • the WD may also include a storage module 1403 for storing program code and data of the source base station.
  • the processing module 1401 can be a processor or a controller. It is possible to implement or carry out the various illustrative logical blocks, modules and circuits described in connection with the present disclosure.
  • the processor may also be a combination of computing functions, for example, including one or more microprocessor combinations, a combination of a DSP and a microprocessor, and the like.
  • the communication module 1402 can be a transceiver, a transceiver circuit, a communication interface, or the like.
  • the storage module 1403 may be a memory.
  • the processing module 1401 is a processor
  • the communication module 1402 is a communication interface
  • the storage module 1403 is a memory
  • the WD involved in the embodiment of the present invention may be the WD shown in FIG. 3.
  • the disclosed apparatus and method may be implemented in other manners.
  • the device embodiments described above are merely illustrative, for example, the division of the modules or units is only one type of logic Functional division, actual implementation may have another division, for example, multiple units or components may be combined or may be integrated into another device, or some features may be ignored or not executed.
  • the mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection shown or discussed may be an indirect coupling or communication connection through some interface, device or unit, and may be in an electrical, mechanical or other form.
  • the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may be one physical unit or multiple physical units, that is, may be located in one place, or may be distributed to multiple different places. . Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution of the embodiment.
  • each functional unit in each embodiment of the present invention may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist physically separately, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
  • the above integrated unit can be implemented in the form of hardware or in the form of a software functional unit.
  • the integrated unit if implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as a standalone product, may be stored in a readable storage medium.
  • the technical solution of the present invention may contribute to the prior art or all or part of the technical solution may be embodied in the form of a software product stored in a storage medium.
  • a number of instructions are included to cause a device (which may be a microcontroller, chip, etc.) or a processor to perform all or part of the steps of the methods described in various embodiments of the present invention.
  • the foregoing storage medium includes various media that can store program codes, such as a USB flash drive, a mobile hard disk, a ROM, a RAM, a magnetic disk, or an optical disk.

Abstract

本发明实施例公开了一种移动性管理方法、基站及可穿戴设备，涉及通信领域，解决了WD的电量消耗严重，网络侧的处理负担加重的问题。具体方案为：源基站接收WD发送的测量报告，并在确定WD测量得到的当前驻留小区的信号质量低于第一测量门限，且确定每个相邻小区的信号质量高于第三测量门限时，确定WD需进行切换，还根据接收到的WD获得的信号质量指示确定WD和UE需进行共同切换，并根据相邻小区的标识确定第一目标小区，且向与第一目标小区对应的第一目标基站发送包括有第一中继指示的第一切换请求。本发明实施例用于移动性管理的过程中。

Description

一种移动性管理方法、基站及可穿戴设备 技术领域
本发明涉及通信领域，尤其涉及一种移动性管理方法、基站及可穿戴设备。
背景技术
可穿戴设备(Wearable Device，WD)是指采用独立操作系统的、由人体佩戴的、实现持续交互的智能设备。且随着智能手机行业市场的饱和，WD直接连接到网络与网络进行通信将成为未来发展的趋势。但是，由于WD的体积小，使得其电池小，且只能采用单天线技术，这样导致了WD的待机时间短，且与网络进行通信时的传输效率较低。
在现有技术中，为了解决上述问题，且考虑到用户设备(User Equipment，UE)连接到网络的技术已经成熟，WD的用户面可以通过UE间接连接到网络，以便与网络进行上下行用户面数据的交互。但为了最大限度的复用现有的控制流程，WD可以继续采用与网络的直接连接进行上下行信令的交互，因此，在WD通过UE间接连接到网络的同时，WD还保留了与网络的直接连接。在这样的场景下，由于WD是通过与网络的直接连接进行上下行信令的传输的，因此WD可以自主地测量当前基站所在小区的信号质量，并在确定当前基站所在小区的信号质量无法满足业务需求时，向当前基站上报测量报告，以便切换到另一个可以满足其业务需求的小区。
现有技术中至少存在如下问题：在WD通过UE间接连接到网络，同时与网络的直接连接的场景下，WD和UE均可自主地测量当前基站所在小区的信号质量并将测量报告上报至当前基站，这样会出现WD和UE一起移动的过程中，被当前基站分别执行切换操作的情况。在这种情况下，对于WD来说，为了尽可能的沿用现有的切换流程，且为了确保WD业务的连续性，在WD执行切换操作之 前，必须先将与当前基站之间的通过UE的间接连接，转换为与当前基站的直接连接，而这个转换过程步骤复杂，从而导致了WD的电量消耗严重，且增加了网络侧的处理负担。
发明内容
本发明实施例提供一种移动性管理方法、基站及可穿戴设备，解决了WD和UE一起移动的过程中，被当前基站分别执行切换操作导致的WD的电量消耗严重，网络侧的处理负担加重的问题。
为达到上述目的，本发明实施例采用如下技术方案：
本发明实施例的第一方面，提供一种移动性管理方法，包括：
源基站接收WD发送的测量报告，该WD发送的测量报告中包括：WD获得的信号质量指示、WD测量得到的当前驻留小区的信号质量、至少一个相邻小区的信号质量和标识，并在确定接收到的WD测量得到的当前驻留小区的信号质量低于第一测量门限，且确定接收到的每个相邻小区的信号质量高于第三测量门限时，确定WD需进行切换操作。且源基站根据接收到的WD获得的信号质量指示确定WD和UE需进行共同切换，并根据WD发送的测量报告中包括的相邻小区的标识确定WD和UE需共同切换到的小区，即第一目标小区。此时，源基站向与第一目标小区对应的第一目标基站发送包括有第一中继指示的第一切换请求。其中，第一中继指示用于指示第一目标基站对WD和UE执行共同切换。
其中，信号质量指示用于指示WD和UE之间的侧链接的信号质量，以及信号质量的恶化趋势；WD与源基站直接连接，用于传输信令，并通过UE与源基站间接连接，用于传输用户面数据，当前驻留小区指的是源基站服务的WD所在的小区。
本发明实施例提供的移动性管理方法，源基站确定出WD需进行切换，并根据WD获得的信号质量指示确定WD和UE需进行共同切换。并可以在确定出WD和UE需共同切换到的小区，即第一目标小区之后，通过向与该第一目标小区对应的第一目标基站发送包括有第一中继指示的第一切换请求，使得第一目标基站可以根据 第一中继指示对WD和UE执行共同切换的操作。由于WD和UE可以进行共同切换，因此WD和UE之间的侧链接无需断开，从而使得WD进行切换时，无需执行将与源基站的间接连接转换为与源基站的直接连接的操作，进而解决了WD和UE一起移动的过程中，被当前基站分别执行切换操作导致的WD的电量消耗严重，网络侧的处理负担加重的问题。
结合第一方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，为了确保WD和UE共同切换的准确性，在源基站根据WD发送的测量报告中包括的相邻小区的标识确定第一目标小区之前，本发明实施例提供的移动性管理方法还可以包括：源基站接收UE发送的测量报告，该UE发送的测量报告包括：UE获得的信号质量指示，UE测量得到的当前驻留小区的信号质量，以及至少一个相邻小区的信号质量，并在确定UE测量得到的当前驻留小区的信号质量低于第一测量门限，且确定每个相邻小区的信号质量高于第二测量门限时，确定UE需进行切换操作。此时，源基站根据WD获得的信号质量指示确定WD和UE需进行共同切换，具体的可以包括：源基站根据WD获得的信号质量指示和UE获得的信号质量指示确定WD和UE需进行共同切换。
结合第一方面和上述可能的实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，当通过UE间接连接至源基站的WD存在至少有两个时，源基站接收到的UE发送的测量报告还包括：侧链接标识(Side Link ID，SLI)。此时，在确定WD和UE需进行共同切换之前，本发明实施例提供的移动性管理方法还可以包括：源基站从至少两个WD中确定与SLI对应的WD为需与UE共同切换的WD。
结合第一方面和上述可能的实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，源基站接收到的UE发送的测量报告中还包括：至少一个相邻小区的标识。此时，源基站根据WD发送的测量报告中包括的相邻小区的标识确定第一目标小区，具体的可以包括：源基站从WD发送的测量报告中包括的至少一个相邻小区和UE发送的测量报告中包括的至少一个相邻小区中选择出备选小区组，该备选小区组中 包括至少一个备选小区，且每个备选小区同时属于WD发送的测量报告中包括的至少一个相邻小区和UE发送的测量报告中包括的至少一个相邻小区。当备选小区组中包括一个备选小区时，源基站将该备选小区确定为第一目标小区，当备选小区组中包括至少两个备选小区时，源基站将至少两个备选小区中UE测量得到的信号质量最好的小区确定为第一目标小区。
结合第一方面和上述可能的实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，源基站向第一目标基站发送的第一切换请求中还可以包括：UE的上下文和WD的上下文，该UE的上下文和WD的上下文用于第一目标基站为UE和WD分配接入第一目标基站所需的资源和PC5无线资源，以便于第一目标基站可以复用接收到的UE的上下文和WD的上下文，为UE和WD分配接入第一目标基站所需的资源和PC5无线资源，进一步的减少了第一目标基站的处理负担。其中，PC5无线资源用于WD和UE更新WD和UE之间的侧链接资源。
结合第一方面和上述可能的实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，在源基站向与第一目标小区对应的第一目标基站发送第一切换请求之后，本发明实施例提供的移动性管理方法还可以包括：源基站接收第一目标基站发送的包括有第二中继指示、第一切换命令和第二切换命令的第一切换请求确认，并向UE发送第一切换命令，向WD发送第二切换命令。
其中，第二中继指示用于通知源基站该第一切换请求确认是针对UE和WD的共同切换的确认，第一切换命令包括UE接入第一目标基站所需的资源和PC5无线资源，第二切换命令包括WD接入第一目标基站所需的资源和PC5无线资源。
结合第一方面和上述可能的实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，在WD进行单独切换的情况下，WD也需要先将与源基站的间接连接转换为与源基站的直接连接，才能进行切换，因此也存在WD的电量消耗严重，网络侧的处理负担加重的问题。为了在WD单独切换的情况下，节省WD的电量，减少网络侧的处理负担，本 发明实施例提供的移动性管理方法还可以包括：源基站根据WD获得的信号质量指示确定WD需进行单独切换。并根据WD发送的测量报告中包括的相邻小区中信号质量最好的小区确定为WD需单独切换到的小区，即第二目标小区。且源基站向与第二目标小区对应的第二目标基站发送包括有WD的上下文的第二切换请求。
结合第一方面和上述可能的实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，在源基站向与第二目标小区对应的第二目标基站发送第二切换请求之后，本发明实施例提供的移动性管理方法还可以包括：源基站接收第二目标基站发送的包括有WD接入第二目标基站所需的资源的第二切换请求确认。并向WD发送第三切换命令和指示信息。其中，第三切换命令包括WD接入第二目标基站所需的资源，指示信息用于指示WD断开与UE之间的侧链接。
结合第一方面和上述可能的实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，源基站根据WD获得的信号质量指示和UE获得的信号质量指示确定WD和UE需进行共同切换，具体的可以包括：源基站根据WD获得的侧链接信号强度和第一指示，以及UE获得侧链接信号强度和第一指示，确定WD和UE需进行共同切换，侧链接信号强度用于表示WD和UE之间的侧链接的信号质量，第一指示用于指示WD和UE之间的侧链接的信号质量的恶化趋势；或者，源基站根据WD获得的第二指示，以及UE获得第二指示，确定WD和UE需进行共同切换，第二指示用于指示WD和UE之间的侧链接的信号质量和WD和UE之间的侧链接的信号质量的恶化趋势。
本发明实施例的第二方面，提供一种移动性管理方法，包括：
目标基站接收源基站发送的包括有第一中继指示的第一切换请求，该第一中继指示用于指示目标基站对WD和UE执行共同切换。并根据第一切换请求对WD和UE执行共同切换。且WD与源基站直接连接，用于传输信令，并通过UE与源基站间接连接，用于传输用户面数据。
本发明实施例提供的移动性管理方法，目标基站可以接收源基 站发送的包括有第一中继指示的第一切换请求，并根据第一中继指示对WD和UE执行共同切换的操作。由于WD和UE可以进行共同切换，因此WD和UE之间的侧链接无需断开，从而使得WD进行切换时，无需执行将与源基站的间接连接转换为与源基站的直接连接的操作，进而解决了WD和UE一起移动的过程中，被当前基站分别执行切换操作导致的WD的电量消耗严重，网络侧的处理负担加重的问题。
结合第二方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，为了进一步的减少目标基站的处理负担，目标基站接收到的第一切换请求中还可以包括：UE的上下文和WD的上下文。此时，目标基站根据第一切换请求对WD和UE执行共同切换，具体的可以包括：目标基站复用UE的上下文和WD的上下文，并根据UE的上下文和WD的上下文为UE和WD分配接入目标基站所需的资源和PC5无线资源，且向源基站发送包括有第二中继指示、第一切换命令和第二切换命令的第一切换请求确认。
其中，第二中继指示用于通知源基站该第一切换请求确认是针对UE和WD的共同切换的确认，第一切换命令包括UE接入目标基站所需的资源和PC5无线资源，第二切换命令包括WD接入目标基站所需的资源和PC5无线资源。
结合第二方面和上述可能的实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，在WD进行单独切换的情况下，WD也需要先将与源基站的间接连接转换为与源基站的直接连接，才能进行切换，因此也存在WD的电量消耗严重，网络侧的处理负担加重的问题。为了在WD单独切换的情况下，节省WD的电量，减少网络侧的处理负担，本发明实施例提供的移动性管理方法还可以包括：目标基站接收源基站发送的包括有WD的上下文的第二切换请求。
结合第二方面和上述可能的实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，在目标基站接收源基站发送的第二切换请求之后，还可以包括：目标基站根据WD的上下文，为WD分配与目标基站进行数据 传输所需的数据无线承载(Data Radio Bearer，DRB)资源，以及接入目标基站所需的资源。并向源基站发送包括有WD接入目标基站所需的资源的第二切换请求确认。
结合第二方面和上述可能的实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，本发明实施例提供的移动性管理方法还可以包括：目标基站向移动管理实体(Mobile Management Entity，MME)发送直接路径转换指示，该直接路径转换指示用于通知MME，WD已断开与UE之间的侧链接。
本发明实施例的第三方面，提供一种移动性管理方法，包括：
WD对当前驻留小区的信号质量进行测量，并对至少一个相邻小区的信号质量进行测量，且WD在确定测量得到的当前驻留小区的信号质量低于第一测量门限，以及当前驻留小区的相邻小区中存在小区的信号质量高于第三测量门限时，向源基站发送测量报告，该WD发送的测量报告中包括：WD获得的信号质量指示，WD测量得到的当前驻留小区的信号质量，以及至少一个信号质量高于第三测量门限的相邻小区的信号质量和标识。且WD接收源基站发送的包括有WD接入目标基站所需的资源和PC5无线资源的第二切换命令，并根据接收到的接入目标基站所需的资源接入目标基站，且根据接收到的PC5无线资源更新WD和UE之间的侧链接资源。
其中，WD与源基站直接连接，用于传输信令，并通过UE与源基站间接连接，用于传输用户面数据，当前驻留小区指的是源基站所在的小区，信号质量指示用于指示WD和UE之间的侧链接的信号质量，以及信号质量的恶化趋势。
本发明实施例提供的移动性管理方法，WD在确定出需要进行切换后，向源基站发送包括有WD获得的用于指示WD和UE之间的侧链接的信号质量以及信号质量的恶化趋势的信号质量指示的测量报告，以便源基站根据接收到的WD获得的信号质量指示确定出WD和UE需进行共同切换。由于WD和UE可以进行共同切换，因此WD和UE之间的侧链接无需断开，从而使得WD进行切换时， 无需执行将与源基站的间接连接转换为与源基站的直接连接的操作，进而解决了WD和UE一起移动的过程中，被当前基站分别执行切换操作导致的WD的电量消耗严重，网络侧的处理负担加重的问题。
结合第三方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，在WD向源基站发送第二测量报告之后，还可以包括：WD接收源基站发送的包括有WD接入目标基站所需的资源的第三切换命令和指示信息，并根据接入目标基站所需的资源接入目标基站，且根据指示信息断开与UE之间的侧链接。
结合第三方面和上述可能的实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，在向源基站发送测量报告之前，还包括：WD获取侧链接信号强度和第一指示，以获得信号质量指示，侧链接信号强度用于表示WD和UE之间的侧链接的信号质量，第一指示用于指示WD和UE之间的侧链接的信号质量的恶化趋势；或者，WD获取第二指示，以获得信号质量指示，第二指示用于指示WD和UE之间的侧链接的信号质量和WD和UE之间的侧链接的信号质量的恶化趋势。
本发明实施例的第四方面，提供一种源基站，包括：
接收单元，用于接收可穿戴设备WD发送的测量报告；WD与源基站直接连接，用于传输信令，并通过用户设备UE与源基站间接连接，用于传输用户面数据，WD发送的测量报告中包括：WD获得的信号质量指示，WD测量得到的当前驻留小区的信号质量，以及至少一个相邻小区的信号质量和标识，信号质量指示用于指示WD和UE之间的侧链接的信号质量，以及信号质量的恶化趋势；确定单元，用于在确定接收单元接收到的WD测量得到的当前驻留小区的信号质量低于第一测量门限，且确定接收单元接收到的每个相邻小区的信号质量高于第三测量门限时，确定WD需进行切换操作，根据接收单元接收到的WD获得的信号质量指示确定WD和UE需进行共同切换，并根据接收单元接收到的WD发送的测量报告中包括的相邻小区的标识确定第一目标小区；第一目标小区为WD和UE 需共同切换到的小区；发送单元，用于向与确定单元确定出的第一目标小区对应的第一目标基站发送第一切换请求，第一切换请求中包括第一中继指示，第一中继指示用于指示第一目标基站对WD和UE执行共同切换。
结合第四方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，接收单元，还用于接收UE发送的测量报告；UE发送的测量报告包括：UE获得的信号质量指示，UE测量得到的当前驻留小区的信号质量，以及至少一个相邻小区的信号质量；确定单元，还用于在确定接收单元接收到的UE测量得到的当前驻留小区的信号质量低于第一测量门限，且确定接收单元接收到的每个相邻小区的信号质量高于第二测量门限时，确定UE需进行切换操作；确定单元，具体用于在根据接收单元接收到的WD获得的信号质量指示和UE获得的信号质量指示确定WD和UE需进行共同切换。
结合第四方面和上述可能的实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，当通过UE间接连接至源基站的WD存在至少两个时，接收单元接收到的UE发送的测量报告还包括：侧链接标识SLI；确定单元，还用于从至少两个WD中确定与SLI对应的WD为需与UE共同切换的WD。
结合第四方面和上述可能的实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，接收单元接收到的UE发送的测量报告还包括：至少一个相邻小区的标识；确定单元，具体用于从接收单元接收到的WD发送的测量报告中包括的至少一个相邻小区和UE发送的测量报告中包括的至少一个相邻小区中，选择出备选小区组，备选小区组中包括至少一个备选小区；当备选小区组中包括一个备选小区时，将该备选小区确定为第一目标小区；当备选小区组中包括至少两个备选小区时，将至少两个备选小区中UE测量得到的信号质量最好的小区确定为第一目标小区。
结合第四方面和上述可能的实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，发送单元发送的第一切换请求中还包括：UE的上下文和WD 的上下文；UE的上下文和WD的上下文用于第一目标基站为UE和WD分配接入第一目标基站所需的资源和PC5无线资源，PC5无线资源用于WD和UE更新WD和UE之间的侧链接资源。
结合第四方面和上述可能的实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，接收单元，还用于接收第一目标基站发送的第一切换请求确认；其中，第一切换请求确认包括第二中继指示、第一切换命令和第二切换命令；第二中继指示用于通知源基站第一切换请求确认是针对UE和WD的共同切换的确认，第一切换命令包括UE接入第一目标基站所需的资源和PC5无线资源，第二切换命令包括WD接入第一目标基站所需的资源和PC5无线资源；发送单元，还用于向UE发送接收单元接收到的第一切换命令，并向WD发送接收单元接收到的第二切换命令。
结合第四方面和上述可能的实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，确定单元，还用于根据接收单元接收到的WD获得的信号质量指示确定WD需进行单独切换；确定单元，还用于将接收单元接收到的WD发送的测量报告中包括的相邻小区中信号质量最好的小区确定为第二目标小区；第二目标小区为WD需单独切换到的小区；发送单元，还用于向与确定单元确定出的第二目标小区对应的第二目标基站发送第二切换请求，第二切换请求中包括WD的上下文。
结合第四方面和上述可能的实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，接收单元，还用于接收第二目标基站发送的第二切换请求确认；其中，第二切换请求确认包括WD接入第二目标基站所需的资源；发送单元，还用于向WD发送第三切换命令和指示信息，第三切换命令包括接收单元接收到的WD接入第二目标基站所需的资源，指示信息用于指示WD断开与UE之间的侧链接。
结合第四方面和上述可能的实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，确定单元，具体用于根据WD获得的侧链接信号强度和第一指示，以及UE获得侧链接信号强度和第一指示，确定WD和UE需进行共同切换，侧链接信号强度用于表示WD和UE之间的侧链接 的信号质量，第一指示用于指示WD和UE之间的侧链接的信号质量的恶化趋势；或者，根据WD获得的第二指示，以及UE获得第二指示，确定WD和UE需进行共同切换，第二指示用于指示WD和UE之间的侧链接的信号质量和WD和UE之间的侧链接的信号质量的恶化趋势。
具体的实现方式可以参考第一方面或第一方面的可能的实现方式提供的移动性管理方法方法中源基站的行为功能。
本发明实施例的第五方面，提供一种目标基站，包括：
接收单元，用于接收源基站发送的第一切换请求，第一切换请求中包括第一中继指示，第一中继指示用于指示目标基站对可穿戴设备WD和用户设备UE执行共同切换，WD与源基站直接连接，用于传输信令，并通过UE与源基站间接连接，用于传输用户面数据；切换单元，用于根据接收单元接收到的第一切换请求对WD和UE执行共同切换。
结合第五方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，接收单元接收的第一切换请求中还包括：UE的上下文和WD的上下文，切换单元，具体用于：复用接收单元接收到的UE的上下文和WD的上下文，并根据UE的上下文和WD的上下文为UE和WD分配接入目标基站所需的资源和PC5无线资源；向源基站发送第一切换请求确认；其中，第一切换请求确认包括第二中继指示、第一切换命令和第二切换命令；第二中继指示用于通知源基站第一切换请求确认是针对UE和WD的共同切换的确认，第一切换命令包括UE接入目标基站所需的资源和PC5无线资源，第二切换命令包括WD接入目标基站所需的资源和PC5无线资源。
结合第五方面和上述可能的实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，接收单元，还用于接收源基站发送的第二切换请求，第二切换请求中包括WD的上下文。
结合第五方面和上述可能的实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，还包括：分配单元，用于根据接收单元接收到的WD的上下 文，为WD分配与目标基站进行数据传输所需的数据无线承载DRB资源，以及接入目标基站所需的资源；发送单元，用于向源基站发送第二切换请求确认；其中，第二切换请求确认包括分配单元分配的WD接入目标基站所需的资源。
结合第五方面和上述可能的实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，发送单元，还用于向移动管理实体MME发送直接路径转换指示，直接路径转换指示用于通知MME，WD已断开与UE之间的侧链接。
具体的实现方式可以参考第二方面或第二方面的可能的实现方式提供的移动性管理方法方法中目标基站的行为功能。
本发明实施例的第六方面，提供一种WD，包括：
测量单元，用于对当前驻留小区的信号质量进行测量，并对至少一个相邻小区的信号质量进行测量；WD与源基站直接连接，用于传输信令，并通过用户设备UE与源基站间接连接，用于传输用户面数据；发送单元，用于在确定测量单元测量得到的当前驻留小区的信号质量低于第一测量门限，且当前驻留小区的相邻小区中存在小区的信号质量高于第三测量门限时，向源基站发送测量报告；其中，WD发送的测量报告中包括：WD获得的信号质量指示，测量单元测量得到的当前驻留小区的信号质量，以及至少一个信号质量高于第三测量门限的相邻小区的信号质量和标识，信号质量指示用于指示WD和UE之间的侧链接的信号质量，以及信号质量的恶化趋势；接收单元，用于接收源基站发送的第二切换命令，第二切换命令包括WD接入目标基站所需的资源和PC5无线资源；接入单元，用于根据接收单元接收到的接入目标基站所需的资源接入目标基站；更新单元，用于根据接收单元接收到的PC5无线资源更新WD和UE之间的侧链接资源。
结合第六方面和上述可能的实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，还包括：断开单元；接收单元，还用于接收源基站发送的第三切换命令和指示信息，第三切换命令包括WD接入目标基站所需 的资源；接入单元，还用于根据接收单元接收到的接入目标基站所需的资源接入目标基站；断开单元，用于根据接收单元接收到的指示信息断开与UE之间的侧链接。
结合第六方面和上述可能的实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，还包括：获取单元，用于：获取侧链接信号强度和第一指示，以获得信号质量指示，侧链接信号强度用于表示WD和UE之间的侧链接的信号质量，第一指示用于指示WD和UE之间的侧链接的信号质量的恶化趋势；或者，获取第二指示，以获得信号质量指示，第二指示用于指示WD和UE之间的侧链接的信号质量和WD和UE之间的侧链接的信号质量的恶化趋势。
具体的实现方式可以参考第三方面或第三方面的可能的实现方式提供的移动性管理方法方法中WD的行为功能。
本发明实施例的第七方面，提供一种源基站，包括：处理器、存储器和收发器；
存储器用于存储计算机执行指令，当源基站运行时，处理器执行存储器存储的计算机执行指令，以使源基站执行如第一方面或第一方面的可能的实现方式中任意一项所述的移动性管理方法。
本发明实施例的第八方面，提供一种目标基站，包括：处理器、存储器和收发器；
存储器用于存储计算机执行指令，当目标基站运行时，处理器执行存储器存储的计算机执行指令，以使目标基站执行如第二方面或第二方面的可能的实现方式中任意一项所述的移动性管理方法。
本发明实施例的第九方面，提供一种WD，包括：处理器、存储器和收发器；
存储器用于存储计算机执行指令，当WD运行时，处理器执行存储器存储的计算机执行指令，以使WD执行如第三方面或第三方面的可能的实现方式中任意一项所述的移动性管理方法。
本发明实施例的第十方面，提供一种计算机存储介质，用于存储上述源基站所用的计算机软件指令，该计算机软件指令包含用于 执行上述移动性管理方法所设计的程序。
本发明实施例的第十一方面，提供一种计算机存储介质，用于存储上述目标基站所用的计算机软件指令，该计算机软件指令包含用于执行上述移动性管理方法所设计的程序。
本发明实施例的第十二方面，提供一种计算机存储介质，用于存储上述WD所用的计算机软件指令，该计算机软件指令包含用于执行上述移动性管理方法所设计的程序。
附图说明
图1为本发明实施例提供的一种应用本发明实施例的系统架构的简化示意图；
图2为本发明实施例提供的一种基站的组成示意图；
图3为本发明实施例提供的一种WD的组成示意图；
图4为本发明实施例提供的一种移动性管理方法的流程图；
图5为本发明实施例提供的另一种移动性管理方法的流程图；
图6为本发明实施例提供的另一种移动性管理方法的流程图；
图7为本发明实施例提供的另一种移动性管理方法的流程图；
图8为本发明实施例提供的另一种移动性管理方法的流程图；
图9为本发明实施例提供的另一种源基站的组成示意图；
图10为本发明实施例提供的另一种源基站的组成示意图；
图11为本发明实施例提供的另一种目标基站的组成示意图；
图12为本发明实施例提供的另一种目标基站的组成示意图；
图13为本发明实施例提供的另一种目标基站的组成示意图；
图14为本发明实施例提供的另一种WD的组成示意图；
图15为本发明实施例提供的另一种WD的组成示意图；
图16为本发明实施例提供的另一种WD的组成示意图。
具体实施方式
本文中术语“系统”和“网络”在本文中常被可互换使用。本文中术语“和/或”，仅仅是一种描述关联对象的关联关系，表示可以存在三种关系，例如，A和/或B，可以表示：单独存在A，同时 存在A和B，单独存在B这三种情况。另外，本文中字符“/”，一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。
为了解决WD和UE一起移动的过程中，被当前基站分别执行切换操作导致的WD的电量消耗严重，网络侧的处理负担加重的问题，本发明实施例提供一种移动性管理方法，其基本原理是：源基站接收WD发送的测量报告，并在确定WD测量得到的当前驻留小区的信号质量低于第一测量门限，且测量报告中包括的每个相邻小区的信号质量高于第三测量门限时，确定WD需进行切换操作，源基站还根据WD获得的信号质量指示确定WD和UE需进行共同切换，并根据WD发送的测量报告中包括的相邻小区的标识确定第一目标小区，且向与第一目标小区对应的第一目标基站发送包括有第一中继指示的第一切换请求。
这样，源基站通过向第一目标基站发送包括有第一中继指示的第一切换请求，使得第一目标基站可以根据第一中继指示对WD和UE执行共同切换的操作。由于WD和UE可以进行共同切换，因此WD和UE之间的侧链接无需断开，从而使得WD进行切换时，无需执行将与源基站的间接连接转换为与源基站的直接连接的操作，进而解决了WD和UE一起移动的过程中，被当前基站分别执行切换操作导致的WD的电量消耗严重，网络侧的处理负担加重的问题。
下面将结合附图对本发明实施例的实施方式进行详细描述。
图1示出的是可以应用本发明实施例的系统架构的简化示意图。如图1所示，该系统架构可以包括：源基站11、WD12、UE13、MME14、服务网关(Serving GateWay，S-GW)15和目标基站16。
WD12与源基站11建立直接连接，并通过该直接连接进行上下行信令的交互，且WD12通过UE13与源基站11建立间接连接，并通过该间接连接进行用户面数据的交互。在WD12和UE13共同切换到目标基站16之后，WD12与目标基站16建立直接连接，并通过该直接连接进行上下行信令的交互，且WD12通过UE13与目标基站16建立间接连接，并通过该间接连接进行用户面数据的交互。
其中，基站(该基站可以是本发明实施例中的源基站11，也可以是本发明实施例中的目标基站16)可以是无线通信的基站(Base Station，BS)或基站控制器等。
基站是一种部署在无线接入网中用以为WD12或者UE13提供无线通信功能的装置，其主要功能有：进行无线资源的管理、互联网协议(Internet Protocol，IP)头的压缩及用户数据流的加密、用户设备附着时进行MME14的选择、路由用户面数据至S-GW15、寻呼消息的组织和发送、广播消息的组织和发送、以移动性或调度为目的的测量及测量报告的配置等等。
基站可以包括各种形式的宏基站、微基站、中继站、接入点等等。在采用不同的无线接入技术的系统中，具备基站功能的设备的名称可能会有所不同，例如，在LTE系统中，称为演进的基站(evolved NodeB，eNB或eNodeB)，在第3代移动通信技术(The 3rd Generation Telecommunication，3G)系统中，称为基站(Node B)等等。随着通信技术的演进，“基站”这一名称可能会变化。此外，在其它可能的情况下，基站可以是其它为WD12或UE13提供无线通信功能的装置。为方便描述，本发明实施例中，为WD12或UE13提供无线通信功能的装置称为基站。
WD12，包括但不限于智能手表、手智能环、智能腕带、智能眼镜、智能项链、智能戒指、智能耳环、智能手机等各类智能的穿戴设备。在实际应用中，WD12自身可以提供蓝牙(Bluetooth，BT)、无线保真(Wireless-Fidelity，Wi-Fi)、近距离无线通讯技术(Near Field Communication，NFC)、红外线(Infrared)等各种可用网络连接能力。
该WD12可以内置加速度计、陀螺仪、磁力计、光线传感器、全球定位系统(Global Positioning System，GPS)等各类传感器以及麦克风、扬声器等输入/输出(Input/Output，I/O)部件。WD12利用上述各类传感器可以有效地检测用户的动作(如跑步、步行等)、用户体征数据(如心率、血压等)以及用户当前所处的地点(即用户当 前所处的位置)等。
UE13是自身可以提供BT、Wi-Fi、NFC、红外线等各种可用网络连接能力的无线终端。无线终端可以是指向用户提供语音和/或数据连通性的设备，具有无线连接功能的手持式设备、或连接到无线调制解调器的其他处理设备。
无线终端可以经无线接入网(Radio Access Network，RAN)与一个或多个核心网进行通信。无线终端可以是移动终端，如移动电话(或称为“蜂窝”电话)和具有移动终端的计算机，也可以是便携式、袖珍式、手持式、计算机内置的或者车载的移动装置，它们与RAN交换语言和/或数据，例如，个人通信业务(Personal Communication Service，PCS)电话、无绳电话、会话发起协议(SIP)话机、无线本地环路(Wireless Local Loop，WLL)站、个人数字助理(Personal Digital Assistant，PDA)等设备。无线终端也可以称为用户代理(User Agent)、用户设备(User Device)。
MME 14主要负责非接入层协议(Non-Access-Stratum，NAS)信令的传输、NAS信令加密、漫游、跟踪、分配用户临时身份标识等功能。
S-GW15负责为WD12和UE13提供业务网关功能，移动锚点功能，策略执行功能等能力。
图2为本发明实施例提供的一种基站的组成示意图，该基站可以是本发明实施例中的源基站，也可以是本发明实施例中的目标基站，如图2所示，基站可以包括至少一个处理器21，存储器22和收发器23。
下面结合图2对基站的各个构成部件进行具体的介绍：
处理器21可以是一个处理器，也可以是多个处理元件的统称。例如，处理器21可以是一个通用中央处理器(central processing unit，CPU)，也可以是特定应用集成电路(application-specific integrated circuit，ASIC)，或一个或多个用于控制本发明方案程序执行的集成电路，例如：一个或多个微处理器(digital signal processor，DSP)， 或，一个或者多个现场可编程门阵列(field programmable gate array，FPGA)。其中，处理器21可以通过运行或执行存储在存储器22内的软件程序，以及调用存储在存储器22内的数据，执行基站的各种功能。
在具体实现中，作为一种实施例，处理器21可以包括一个或多个CPU，例如图2中所示的CPU0和CPU1。
在具体实现中，作为一种实施例，基站可以包括多个处理器，例如图2中所示的处理器21和处理器24。这些处理器中的每一个可以是一个单核处理器(single-CPU)，也可以是一个多核处理器(multi-CPU)。这里的处理器可以指一个或多个设备、电路、和/或用于处理数据(例如计算机程序指令)的处理核。
存储器22可以是只读存储器(read-only memory，ROM)或可存储静态信息和指令的其他类型的静态存储设备，随机存取存储器(random access memory，RAM)或者可存储信息和指令的其他类型的动态存储设备，也可以是电可擦可编程只读存储器(electrically erasable programmable read-only memory，EEPROM)、只读光盘(compact disc read-only memory，CD-ROM)或其他光盘存储、光碟存储(包括压缩光碟、激光碟、光碟、数字通用光碟、蓝光光碟等)、磁盘存储介质或者其他磁存储设备、或者能够用于携带或存储具有指令或数据结构形式的期望的程序代码并能够由计算机存取的任何其他介质，但不限于此。
存储器可以是独立存在，通过总线与处理器相连接。存储器也可以和处理器集成在一起。
其中，存储器22用于存储执行本发明方案的应用程序代码，并由处理器21来控制执行。处理器21用于执行存储器22中存储的应用程序代码。
收发器23，用于与其他设备或通信网络通信，如以太网，RAN，无线局域网(wireless local area networks，WLAN)等。在本发明实施例中，收发器23可以包括基带处理器的全部或部分，以及还可选 择性地包括射频(Radio Frequency，RF)处理器。RF处理器用于收发RF信号，基带处理器则用于实现由RF信号转换的基带信号或即将转换为RF信号的基带信号的处理。
图3为本发明实施例提供的一种WD的组成示意图，如图3所示，WD可以包括至少一个处理器31，存储器32和收发器33。
处理器31可以是一个处理器，也可以是多个处理元件的统称。例如，处理器31可以是一个CPU，也可以是ASIC，或一个或多个用于控制本发明方案程序执行的集成电路，例如：一个或多个DSP，或，一个或者多个FPGA。
其中，处理器31可以通过运行或执行存储在存储器32内的软件程序，以及调用存储在存储器32内的数据，执行WD的各种功能。
在具体实现中，作为一种实施例，处理器31可以包括一个或多个CPU，例如图3中的CPU0和CPU1。
在具体实现中，作为一种实施例，WD可以包括多个处理器，例如图3中的处理器31和处理器34。这些处理器中的每一个可以是一个单核处理器，也可以是一个多核处理器。这里的处理器可以指一个或多个设备、电路、和/或用于处理数据(例如计算机程序指令)的处理核。
存储器32可以是ROM或可存储静态信息和指令的其他类型的静态存储设备，RAM或者可存储信息和指令的其他类型的动态存储设备，也可以是EEPROM、CD-ROM或其他光盘存储、光碟存储(包括压缩光碟、激光碟、光碟、数字通用光碟、蓝光光碟等)、磁盘存储介质或者其他磁存储设备、或者能够用于携带或存储具有指令或数据结构形式的期望的程序代码并能够由计算机存取的任何其他介质，但不限于此。
存储器可以是独立存在，通过总线与处理器相连接。存储器也可以和处理器集成在一起。
收发器33，用于与其他设备或通信网络通信，如以太网，RAN，WLAN等。收发器33可以包括接收单元实现接收功能，以及发送单 元实现发送功能。
图4为本发明实施例提供的一种移动性管理方法的流程图，如图4所示，该方法可以包括：
401、WD对当前驻留小区的信号质量进行测量，并对至少一个相邻小区的信号质量进行测量。
其中，当前驻留小区指的是源基站服务的WD所在的小区，至少一个相邻小区为WD获得的与当前驻留小区相邻的小区。在WD与源基站直接连接，并通过UE与源基站间接连接，且WD当前有业务正在传输的场景下，若WD发生移动，则可以对当前驻留小区的信号质量进行测量，并对至少一个相邻小区的信号质量进行测量。
402、WD在确定测量得到的当前驻留小区的信号质量低于第一测量门限，且当前驻留小区的相邻小区中存在小区的信号质量高于第三测量门限时，向源基站发送测量报告。
在WD对当前驻留小区的信号质量进行了测量，并对当前驻留小区的相邻小区的信号质量进行了测量之后，WD可以在确定测量得到的当前驻留小区的信号质量低于第一测量门限，即表明当前驻留小区的信号质量无法满足WD的业务需求，且当前驻留小区的相邻小区中存在信号质量高于第三测量门限的小区，即表明存在相邻小区的信号质量能够满足WD的业务需求时，向源基站发送测量报告，该WD发送的测量报告中包括：WD获得的信号质量指示，WD测量得到的当前驻留小区的信号质量，至少一个相邻小区(该至少一个相邻小区指的是：当前驻留小区的相邻小区中信号质量高于第三测量门限的小区)的信号质量和标识。
其中，WD获得的信号质量指示用于指示WD和UE之间的侧链接的信号质量，以及信号质量的恶化趋势。
示例性的，WD可以周期性的对WD和UE之间的侧链接的信号质量进行测量，根据预设时间段内测量得到的信号质量的变化，可以确定出信号质量的恶化趋势。例如，WD第二次测量得到信号质量低于第一次测量得到的信号质量，第三次测量得到的信号质量 低于第二次测量得到的信号质量，此时WD可以确定出信号质量的恶化趋势为正在变差。
403、源基站接收WD发送的测量报告。
404、源基站根据WD发送的测量报告，确定WD需进行切换操作，并确定WD和UE需进行共同切换，且确定第一目标小区。
其中，第一目标小区为WD和UE需共同切换到的小区。
在源基站接收到WD发送的测量报告之后，源基站可以根据WD发送的测量报告中包括的WD测量得到的当前驻留小区的信号质量、至少一个相邻小区的信号质量，在确定WD测量得到的当前驻留小区的信号质量低于第一测量门限，且确定每个相邻小区的信号质量高于第三测量门限时，确定出WD需进行切换操作。
并可以根据WD获得的信号质量指示确定出WD和UE需进行共同切换。
且源基站可以根据WD发送的测量报告中包括的至少一个相邻小区的标识，确定出第一目标小区。
例如，在WD和UE之间的侧链接的信号质量高于阈值，且信号质量没有恶化趋势时，确定WD和UE需进行共同切换。在WD和UE之间的侧链接的信号质量低于阈值和/或信号质量有恶化趋势时WD和UE不需进行共同切换。
405、源基站向与第一目标小区对应的第一目标基站发送第一切换请求。
其中，第一切换请求中包括第一中继指示，第一中继指示用于指示第一目标基站对WD和UE执行共同切换。在源基站确定出WD需进行切换操作，并确定出WD和UE需进行共同切换，且确定出第一目标小区之后，源基站可以通过X2接口向与第一目标小区对应的第一目标基站发送包括有第一中继指示的第一切换请求。
406、目标基站接收源基站发送的第一切换请求。
407、目标基站根据第一切换请求，对WD和UE执行共同切换。
本发明实施例提供的移动性管理方法，源基站确定出WD需进 行切换，并根据WD获得的信号质量指示确定WD和UE需进行共同切换。并可以在确定出WD和UE需共同切换到的小区，即第一目标小区之后，通过向与该第一目标小区对应的第一目标基站发送包括有第一中继指示的第一切换请求，使得第一目标基站可以根据第一中继指示对WD和UE执行共同切换的操作。由于WD和UE可以进行共同切换，因此WD和UE之间的侧链接无需断开，从而使得WD进行切换时，无需执行将与源基站的间接连接转换为与源基站的直接连接的操作，进而解决了WD和UE一起移动的过程中，被当前基站分别执行切换操作导致的WD的电量消耗严重，网络侧的处理负担加重的问题。
需要说明的是，为了便于本领域技术人员的理解，本发明实施例以下均以UE发送的测量报告为第一测量报告，WD发送的测量报告为第二测量报告为例，对本发明实施例提供的移动性管理方法进行具体介绍。
图5为本发明实施例提供的一种移动性管理方法的流程图，在WD通过UE(其中UE和WD当前驻留在同一小区中)间接连接到网络，同时与网络直接连接，且WD当前有业务正在传输的场景下，若UE和WD一起移动，则可能出现当前驻留小区无法满足WD的业务需求的情况，此时，为了保证WD的业务连续性，且为了尽可能的减小WD的电量消耗，UE和WD可以共同切换到另一个可以满足WD的业务需求的小区，以便通过该小区继续为WD提供服务。如图5所示，该方法可以包括：
501、源基站向UE发送第一测量控制信令。
其中，第一测量控制(Measurement Control)信令中可以包括：第一测量门限和第二测量门限，第一测量门限用于判断当前驻留小区的信号质量(Signal Strength)是否满足UE的业务需求。
第二测量门限用于判断第一相邻小区组中包括的第一相邻小区的信号质量是否满足UE的业务需求，第一相邻小区组中可以包括至少一个第一相邻小区，所述的第一相邻小区为与UE的当前驻留 小区相邻的小区。
为了在UE发生移动，且由于移动导致当前驻留小区无法满足UE的业务需求时，UE可以及时切换到另一个能够满足其业务需求的小区，源基站可以预先向UE发送用于确定当前驻留小区以及与当前驻留小区相邻的小区是否满足UE的业务需求的第一测量控制信令。
需要说明的是，源基站可以为第一相邻小区组中包括的每个第一相邻小区配置不同的测量门限，也可以为第一相邻小区组中包括的所有第一相邻小区配置相同的测量门限，还可以为第一相邻小区组中包括的部分第一相邻小区配置相同的测量门限，对于源基站为第一相邻小区组中的第一相邻小区配置的测量门限的具体方式本发明实施例在此不做限定，可以根据实际应用场景的需求进行设置。
502、UE接收源基站发送的第一测量控制信令。
503、UE向源基站发送第一测量报告。
其中，在UE接收到源基站发送的第一测量控制信令之后，若UE发生移动，则可以对当前驻留小区的信号质量和第一相邻小区组中的每个第一相邻小区的信号质量进行测量，并根据接收到的第一测量控制信令中包括的第一测量门限判断当前驻留小区的信号质量是否满足当前的业务需求，根据第一测量控制信令中包括的第二测量门限判断每个第一相邻小区的信号质量是否满足当前的业务需求，当UE确定出当前驻留小区的信号质量低于第一测量门限，即表明当前驻留小区的信号质量无法满足当前的业务需求，且确定出第一相邻小区组中存在第一相邻小区的信号质量高于第二测量门限，即表明存在第一相邻小区的信号质量能够满足当前的业务需求时，UE便可以向源基站发送第一测量报告(Measurement Report)。其中，将第一相邻小区组中的信号质量高于第二测量门限的第一相邻小区包括在第三相邻小区组中。
在第一种可能的实现方式中，该第一测量报告中可以包括：SLI、UE测量得到的当前驻留小区的信号质量、第三相邻小区组中的每个 第一相邻小区的信号质量和标识、侧链接信号强度(Side Link Signal Strength)，以及第一指示(该第一指示可以为侧链接信号强度恶化指示，即Side Link Signal Strength Deterioration Indicator)；在第二种可能的实现方式中，该第一测量报告中可以包括：SLI、UE测量得到的当前驻留小区的信号质量、第三相邻小区组中的每个第一相邻小区的信号质量和标识，以及第二指示。
其中，SLI指的是该WD和UE之间的侧链接(Side Link)承载的标识。SLI用于确定与UE连接的WD中需进行共同切换的WD。
当该第一测量报告中包括侧链接信号强度和第一指示时，侧链接信号强度用于指示WD和UE之间的侧链接的信号质量，第一指示用于指示WD和UE之间的侧链接的信号质量的恶化趋势，以便根据UE和WD之间的侧链接的信号质量和信号质量的恶化趋势确定UE和WD是否需要进行共同切换。第一指示的取值可以是：0或1，在一种可能的实现方式中，可以用0代表侧链接的信号质量没有正在变差，1代表侧链接的信号质量正在变差，在另一种可能的实现方式中，可以用1代表侧链接的信号质量没有正在变差，0代表侧链接的信号质量正在变差，或者，还可以用其他的取值来表示侧链接的信号质量的恶化趋势。
需要说明的是，第一指示的具体取值可以根据实际应用场景的需求进行设置，本发明实施例在此不做具体限制。
在本发明实施例中以第一指示的取值为0或1，用0代表侧链接的信号质量没有正在变差，1代表侧链接的信号质量正在变差为例。
UE向源基站发送的第一测量报告中包括的侧链接信号强度和第一指示，可能存在四种情况：
侧链接信号强度高于阈值，第一指示为0，此时侧链接信号强度和第一指示用于指示WD和UE之间的侧链接的信号质量情况满足共同切换的条件。
侧链接信号强度高于阈值，第一指示为1，此时侧链接信号强 度和第一指示用于指示UE和WD之间的侧链接的信号质量情况不满足共同切换的条件。
侧链接信号强度低于阈值，第一指示为0，此时侧链接信号强度和第一指示用于指示UE和WD之间的侧链接的信号质量情况不满足共同切换的条件。
侧链接信号强度低于阈值，第一指示为1，此时侧链接信号强度和第一指示用于指示UE和WD之间的侧链接的信号质量情况不满足共同切换的条件。
示例性的，假设UE向源基站发送的第一测量报告中包括的侧链接信号强度高于阈值，第一指示为0，两者用于指示UE和WD之间的侧链接的信号质量情况满足共同切换的条件。
当该第一测量报告中包括第二指示时，第二指示用于指示WD和UE之间的侧链接的信号质量和信号质量的恶化趋势，以便根据UE和WD之间的侧链接的信号质量和信号质量的恶化趋势确定UE和WD是否需要进行共同切换。
其中，在一种可能的实现方式中，第二指示的取值可以是：00、01、10、11。
00代表侧链接的信号质量高于阈值，且侧链接的信号质量没有正在变差，此时第二指示用于指示UE和WD之间的侧链接的信号质量情况满足共同切换的条件。
01代表侧链接的信号质量高于阈值，且侧链接的信号质量正在变差，此时第二指示用于指示UE和WD之间的侧链接的信号质量情况不满足共同切换的条件。
10代表侧链接的信号质量低于阈值，且侧链接的信号质量没有正在变差，此时第二指示用于指示UE和WD之间的侧链接的信号质量情况不满足共同切换的条件。
11代表侧链接的信号质量低于阈值，且侧链接的信号质量正在变差，此时第二指示用于指示UE和WD之间的侧链接的信号质量情况不满足共同切换的条件。
示例性的，假设UE向源基站发送的第一测量报告中包括的第二指示为00，即侧链接的信号强度质量高于阈值，侧链接的信号质量没有正在变差，用来指示UE和WD之间的侧链接的信号质量情况满足共同切换的条件。
其中，需要说明的是，侧链接信号强度和第一指示，或者第二指示可以是UE检测UE和WD之间的侧链接的信号质量得到的。UE可以对UE和WD之间的侧链接的信号质量进行周期性的测量，以得到侧链接信号强度和第一指示，或者得到第二指示。例如，UE可以每1s(秒)对UE和WD之间的侧链接的信号质量测量一次。
504、源基站向WD发送第二测量控制信令。
其中，第二测量控制信令中可以包括：第一测量门限和第三测量门限，第一测量门限用于判断当前驻留小区的信号质量是否满足WD的业务需求，第三测量门限用于判断第二相邻小区组中包括的第二相邻小区的信号质量是否满足WD的业务需求，第二相邻小区组中可以包括至少一个第二相邻小区，所述的第二相邻小区为与WD的当前驻留小区相邻的小区。
由于WD是通过与网络的直接连接进行上下行信令的传输的，因此，为了在WD发生移动，且由于移动导致当前驻留小区无法满足WD的业务需求时，WD可以及时切换到另一个能够满足其业务需求的小区，源基站可以预先通过与WD的直接连接向WD发送用于确定当前驻留小区以及与当前驻留小区相邻的小区是否满足WD的业务需求的第二测量控制信令。
需要说明的是，源基站可以为第二相邻小区组中包括的每个第二相邻小区配置不同的测量门限，也可以为第二相邻小区组中包括的所有第二相邻小区配置相同的测量门限，还可以为第二相邻小区组中包括的部分第二相邻小区配置相同的测量门限，对于源基站为第二相邻小区组中的第二相邻小区配置的测量门限的具体方式本发明实施例在此不做限定，可以根据实际应用场景的需求进行设置。
505、WD接收源基站发送的第二测量控制信令。
506、WD向源基站发送第二测量报告。
其中，在WD接收到源基站发送的第二测量控制信令之后，若WD发生移动，则可以对当前驻留小区的信号质量和第二相邻小区组中的每个第二相邻小区的信号质量进行测量。
并根据接收到的第二测量控制信令中包括的第一测量门限判断当前驻留小区的信号质量是否满足当前的业务需求，根据第二测量控制信令中包括的第三测量门限判断每个第二相邻小区的信号质量是否满足当前的业务需求。
当WD确定出当前驻留小区的信号质量低于第一测量门限，即表明当前驻留小区的信号质量无法满足当前的业务需求，且确定出第二相邻小区组中存在第二相邻小区的信号质量高于第三测量门限，即表明存在第二相邻小区的信号质量能够满足当前的业务需求时，WD便可以向源基站发送第二测量报告。
其中，将第二相邻小区组中的信号质量高于第三测量门限的第二相邻小区包括在第四相邻小区组中。
在第一种可能的实现方式中，该第二测量报告中可以包括：WD测量得到的当前驻留小区的信号质量、第四相邻小区组中的每个第二相邻小区的信号质量和标识、侧链接信号强度，以及第一指示；在第二种可能的实现方式中，该第二测量报告中可以包括：WD测量得到的当前驻留小区的信号质量、第四相邻小区组中的每个第二相邻小区的信号质量和标识，以及第二指示。
需要说明的是，第二测量报告中包括的参数的具体描述与第一测量报告中包括的参数的具体描述类似，对于第二测量报告中包括的参数的具体描述可以参考步骤503中对第一测量报告中包括的相应参数的具体描述，本发明实施例在此不再一一赘述。
当该第二测量报告中包括侧链接信号强度和第一指示时，示例性的，假设WD向源基站发送的第二测量报告中包括的侧链接信号强度高于阈值，第一指示为0，两者用来指示UE和WD之间的侧链接的信号质量情况满足共同切换的条件。
当该第二测量报告中包括第二指示时，示例性的，假设WD向源基站发送的第二测量报告中包括的第二指示为00，即侧链接的信号质量高于阈值，且侧链接的信号质量没有正在变差，用来指示UE和WD之间的侧链接的信号质量情况满足共同切换的条件。
其中，需要说明的是，侧链接信号强度和第一指示，或者第二指示可以是WD检测UE和WD之间的侧链接的信号质量得到的。WD可以对UE和WD之间的侧链接的信号质量进行周期性的测量，以得到侧链接信号强度和第一指示，或者得到第二指示。例如，WD可以每2s(秒)对UE和WD之间的侧链接的信号质量测量一次。
需要说明的是，在本发明实施例中，步骤501-步骤503，与步骤504-步骤506的执行没有先后关系，即可以先执行步骤501-步骤503，然后再执行步骤504-步骤506，或者，也可以先执行步骤504-步骤506，然后再执行步骤501-步骤503，本发明实施例在此对步骤501-步骤503，与步骤504-步骤506的执行顺序不做具体限制。
507、源基站接收UE发送的第一测量报告，并接收WD发送的第二测量报告。
508、源基站根据第一测量报告和第二测量报告，确定UE和WD需要进行共同切换，并确定目标小区。
其中，目标小区指的是UE和WD需共同切换到的当前驻留小区的相邻小区。
对应于步骤503中的第一测量报告的第一种可能的实现方式，在源基站接收到UE发送的第一测量报告之后，源基站可以判断第一测量报告中包括的UE测量得到的当前驻留小区的信号质量是否低于第一测量门限，并判断第一测量报告中包括的第三相邻小区组中的每个第一相邻小区的信号质量是否高于第二测量门限。
然后根据判断得到的当前驻留小区的信号质量低于第一测量门限，第三相邻小区组中的每个第一相邻小区的信号质量高于第二测量门限，确定出该UE需要进行切换。
且源基站可以根据第一测量报告中包括的侧链接信号强度和第 一指示，判断UE和WD之间的侧链接的信号质量情况是否满足共同切换的条件，从而可以根据UE和WD之间的侧链接的信号质量情况是否满足共同切换的条件，确定UE和WD是否需要进行共同切换。
示例性的，按照步骤503中的例子，源基站可以根据第一测量报告中包括的侧链接信号强度高于阈值，第一指示为0，确定出UE和WD之间的侧链接的信号质量情况满足共同切换的条件，此时源基站便可以根据得到的UE和WD之间的侧链接的信号质量情况满足共同切换的条件，确定出UE和WD需要进行共同切换。
对应于步骤503中的第一测量报告的第二种可能的实现方式，在源基站接收到UE发送的第一测量报告之后，源基站可以判断第一测量报告中包括的UE测量得到的当前驻留小区的信号质量是否低于第一测量门限。
并判断第一测量报告中包括的第三相邻小区组中的每个第一相邻小区的信号质量是否高于第二测量门限。
然后根据判断得到的当前驻留小区的信号质量低于第一测量门限，第三相邻小区组中的每个第一相邻小区的信号质量高于第二测量门限，确定出该UE需要进行切换。
且源基站可以根据第一测量报告中包括的第二指示，判断UE和WD之间的侧链接的信号质量情况是否满足共同切换的条件，从而可以根据UE和WD之间的侧链接的信号质量情况是否满足共同切换的条件，确定UE和WD是否需要进行共同切换。
示例性的，按照步骤503中的例子，源基站可以根据第一测量报告中包括的第二指示00，即侧链接的信号质量高于阈值，侧链接的信号质量没有正在变差，确定出UE和WD之间的侧链接的信号质量情况满足共同切换的条件。此时源基站便可以根据得到的UE和WD之间的侧链接的信号质量情况满足共同切换的条件，确定出UE和WD需要进行共同切换。
对应于步骤506中的第二测量报告的第一种可能的实现方式， 在源基站接收到WD发送的第二测量报告之后，源基站可以判断第二测量报告中包括的WD测量得到的当前驻留小区的信号质量是否低于第一测量门限。
并判断第二测量报告中包括的第四相邻小区组中的每个第二相邻小区的信号质量是否高于第三测量门限。
然后根据判断得到的当前驻留小区的信号质量低于第一测量门限，第四相邻小区组中的每个第二相邻小区的信号质量高于第三测量门限，确定出该WD需要进行切换。
且源基站可以根据第二测量报告中包括的侧链接信号强度和第一指示，判断UE和WD之间的侧链接的信号质量情况是否满足共同切换的条件，从而可以根据UE和WD之间的侧链接的信号质量情况是否满足共同切换的条件，确定UE和WD是否需要进行共同切换。
示例性的，按照步骤506中的例子，源基站可以根据第二测量报告中包括的侧链接信号强度高于阈值，第一指示为0，确定出UE和WD之间的侧链接的信号质量情况满足共同切换的条件，此时，源基站便可以根据得到的UE和WD之间的侧链接的信号质量情况满足共同切换的条件，确定出UE和WD需要进行共同切换。
对应于步骤506中的第二测量报告的第二种可能的实现方式，在源基站接收到WD发送的第二测量报告之后，源基站可以判断第二测量报告中包括的WD测量得到的当前驻留小区的信号质量是否低于第一测量门限。
并判断第二测量报告中包括的第四相邻小区组中的每个第二相邻小区的信号质量是否高于第三测量门限。
然后根据判断得到的当前驻留小区的信号质量低于第一测量门限，第四相邻小区组中的每个第二相邻小区的信号质量高于第三测量门限，确定出该WD需要进行切换。
且源基站可以根据第二测量报告中包括的第二指示，判断UE和WD之间的侧链接的信号质量情况是否满足共同切换的条件，从 而可以根据UE和WD之间的侧链接的信号质量情况是否满足共同切换的条件，确定UE和WD是否需要进行共同切换。
示例性的，按照步骤506中的例子，源基站可以根据第二测量报告中包括的第二指示00，即侧链接的信号质量高于阈值，侧链接的信号质量没有正在变差，确定出UE和WD之间的侧链接的信号质量情况满足共同切换的条件，此时，源基站便可以根据得到的UE和WD之间的侧链接的信号质量情况满足共同切换的条件，确定出UE和WD需要进行共同切换。
在源基站根据第一测量报告和第二测量报告确定出UE和WD需要进行共同切换之后，由于UE可能同时连接有多个WD，因此，源基站还可以根据第一测量报告中包括的SLI，确定出与UE连接的WD中需进行共同切换的WD。
具体的，源基站可以根据WD的上下文，为WD分配用于区分WD和UE的数据包的层2ID(Layer 2 ID，L2 ID)。且源基站为不同WD分配的L2 ID不同，并分配用于标识UE和WD之间的侧链接承载的SLI，还会将L2 ID、SLI以及SLI和L2 ID的对应关系进行保存。因此，在源基站接收到UE发送的第一测量报告之后，源基站根据第一测量报告中包含的SLI，通过查找保存的SLI和L2 ID的对应关系，便可以确定出与第一测量报告中包括的SLI对应的L2ID，从而确定出与UE连接的是多个WD中具体是哪个WD需与UE进行共同切换。
在源基站确定出需与UE共同切换的WD之后，源基站可以根据第一测量报告中包括的第三相邻小区组中的每个第一相邻小区的标识和第二测量报告中包括的第四相邻小区组中的每个第二相邻小区的标识，确定目标小区。
具体的确定方法可以是：源基站可以根据第三相邻小区组中的每个第一相邻小区的标识和第四相邻小区组中的每个第二相邻小区的标识，从第三相邻小区组和第四相邻小区组中选择出具有相同标识的相邻小区作为备选小区组，备选小区组中可以包括至少一个备 选小区，若备选小区组中只包括一个备选小区，则源基站确定该备选小区为目标小区，若备选小区组中包括多个备选小区，则源基站可以根据第一测量报告中包括的第三相邻小区组中的每个第一相邻小区的信号质量，从备选小区组中选择出UE测量得到的信号质量最好的相邻小区作为目标小区。
当然，当与UE连接的WD仅有一个时，则第一测量报告中无需包括SLI，源基站也无需执行根据SLI确定与UE进行共同切换的WD是哪个的操作，而是在确定出UE和WD需要进行共同切换之后，直接执行确定目标小区的操作。
需要说明的是，如果源基站没有同时接收到第一测量报告和第二测量报告，那么源基站可以根据先接收到的测量报告判断UE和WD是否需要进行共同切换。若确定出UE和WD需要进行共同切换，则源基站可以在确定出UE和WD需要进行共同切换后，判断在预设时间段内是否接收到另一个测量报告。若在预设时间段内接收到另一个测量报告，则在根据另一个测量报告确定出UE和WD需要进行共同的切换后，执行步骤509；若在预设时间段内没有接收到另一个测量报告，或者在预设时间段内接收到另一个测量报告，但根据另一个测量报告确定出UE和WD不需要进行共同切换，则确定UE和WD不需要进行共同切换。
509、源基站向与目标小区对应的目标基站发送切换请求。
其中，在源基站根据第一测量报告和第二测量报告，确定出UE和WD需要进行共同切换，并确定出目标小区之后，源基站可以通过X2接口向与目标小区对应的目标基站发送切换请求(Handover Request)。该切换请求中可以包括：中继指示(Relay Indicator)、UE的上下文(UE Context Information)和WD的上下文(WD Context Information)。
其中，中继指示用于指示目标基站对UE和WD进行共同切换。UE的上下文中可以包括：第一无线资源控制(Radio Resource Control，RRC)上下文(第一RRC上下文中可以包括无线承载ID (Radio Bearer ID，RB ID))、L2 ID、SLI、SLI和L2 ID的对应关系以及SLI和RB ID的对应关系，其中，RB ID为UE和源基站之间的DRB的标识，L2 ID为源基站为WD分配的标识，SLI为WD和UE之间的侧链接的标识。WD的上下文中可以包括第二RRC上下文，该第二RRC上下文中可以包括EBI，该EBI为WD和核心网之间的演进分组系统(Evolved Packet System，EPS)承载的标识。
510、目标基站接收源基站发送的切换请求。
其中，目标基站可以通过X2接口接收源基站发送的切换请求。
511、目标基站根据切换请求，复用UE的上下文和WD的上下文，并分配传输业务数据的资源、PC5无线资源和接入资源。
其中，在目标基站接收到源基站发送的切换请求后，目标基站可以根据切换请求中包括的中继指示确定WD和UE需共同切换到自身的覆盖范围内，即目标小区中。且源基站可以根据UE的上下文中包括的SLI，确定出UE和WD之间的侧链接仍然存在，从而可以分配用于WD和UE更新WD和UE之间的侧链接所需的PC5无线资源，PC5指的是UE和WD之间的接口。目标基站还可以直接复用UE的上下文中包括的L2 ID、SLI、SLI和L2 ID的对应关系以及SLI和RB ID的对应关系，而无需重新生成。
目标基站还可以根据切换请求中包含的UE的上下文和WD的上下文，为UE和WD的共同切换分配并预留传输业务数据的资源，且目标基站可以分配接入资源，接入资源可以包括：第一标识、第二标识、第一前导码、第二前导码。其中，该第一标识可以是第一C-RNTI，第二标识可以是第二C-RNTI。
其中，第一标识用于标识UE，第一前导码用于UE接入目标基站，第二标识用于标识WD，第二前导码用于WD接入目标基站。
512、目标基站向源基站发送切换请求确认。
其中，在目标基站根据切换请求，复用了UE的上下文和WD的上下文，并分配了传输业务数据的资源、PC5无线资源和接入资源之后，目标基站可以向源基站发送切换请求确认(Handover  Request Ack)。该切换请求确认中可以包括：中继指示、第一切换命令(Handover Command)和第二切换命令，其中，中继指示用于通知源基站，该切换请求确认为针对UE和WD的共同切换的确认，第一切换命令包括在第一信息中，第一信息具体的可以是第一目标到源的透明容器(Target to source transparent container)，第二切换命令包括在第二信息中，第二信息具体的可以是第二Target to source transparent container，该第一切换命令中可以包括第一标识、第一前导码(Preamble)和PC5无线资源，该第二切换命令中可以包括第二标识、第二前导码和PC5无线资源。
513、源基站接收目标基站发送的切换请求确认。
514、源基站将切换请求确认中包括的第一切换命令发送至UE。
其中，在源基站接收到目标基站发送的切换请求确认之后，源基站可以将切换请求确认中包括的第一切换命令发送至UE。示例性的，源基站可以将第一切换命令携带在RRC链接重配(RRC Connection Reconfiguration)中发送至UE。
515、UE接收源基站发送的第一切换命令。
516、UE根据第一切换命令断开与源基站的连接，并接入目标基站。
其中，在UE接收到源基站发送的第一切换命令之后，UE可以根据第一切换命令断开与源基站的连接，与目标基站进行同步，并根据第一切换命令中包括的第一前导码接入目标基站，并在接入目标基站时携带第一标识，以便于目标基站根据第一标识确定出接入目标基站的是UE，并根据第一标识确定出UE的上下文，进而根据步骤511中的UE的上下文建立与UE之间的满足QoS的DRB。
517、源基站将切换请求确认中包括的第二切换命令发送至WD。
其中，在源基站接收到目标基站发送的切换请求确认之后，源基站可以将切换请求确认中包括的第二切换命令发送至WD。示例性的，源基站可以将第二切换命令携带在RRC链接重配中发送至 WD。
518、WD接收源基站发送的第二切换命令。
需要说明的是，在本发明实施例中，步骤514-步骤515，与步骤517-步骤518的执行没有先后关系，即在执行完步骤513之后，可以先执行步骤514-步骤515，然后再执行步骤517-步骤518，或者，也可以先执行步骤517-步骤518，然后再执行步骤514-步骤515，本发明实施例在此对步骤514-步骤515，与步骤517-步骤518的执行顺序不做具体限制。
519、WD根据第二切换命令断开与源基站的连接，并接入目标基站。
其中，在WD接收到源基站发送的第二切换命令之后，WD可以根据第二切换命令断开与源基站的连接，与目标基站进行同步，并根据第二切换命令中包括的第二前导码接入目标基站，并在接入目标基站时携带第二标识，以便于目标基站根据第二标识确定出接入目标基站的是WD，并根据第二标识查找到WD的上下文，进而根据步骤511中的WD的上下文，建立与WD的直接连接。
520、UE根据第一切换命令中包括的PC5无线资源更新侧链接资源。
其中，在UE根据第一切换命令断开与源基站的连接，并接入目标基站之后，UE可以根据第一切换命令中包括的PC5无线资源更新侧链接资源，以便成功切换到目标小区中，此时若UE有上行数据需要发送，则可以直接将上行数据发送给目标基站，以便于目标基站将接收到的上行数据转发至S-GW，进而完成上行数据的传输。
521、WD根据第二切换命令中包括的PC5无线资源更新侧链接资源。
其中，在WD根据第二切换命令断开与源基站的连接，并接入目标基站之后，WD可以根据第二切换命令中包括的PC5无线资源更新侧链接资源，以便成功切换到目标小区中，此时若WD有上行数据需要发送，则可以通过UE将上行数据转发至目标基站，以便 于目标基站将接收到的上行数据转发至S-GW，进而完成上行数据的传输。
需要说明的是，为了实现WD和UE的共同切换，且为了确保WD的业务连续性，在本发明实施例中，优选的，步骤516和步骤519可以同时执行，步骤520和步骤521也可以同时执行。
522、UE向目标基站发送第一切换确认。
其中，为了可以使得目标基站获知UE已成功切换至目标小区，在UE的侧链接资源更新完成之后，UE可以向目标基站发送用于通知已成功切换至目标小区的第一切换确认(Handover Confirm)。
523、目标基站接收UE发送的第一切换确认。
其中，目标基站在接收到UE发送的第一切换确认之后，可以根据接收到的第一切换确认确定UE已成功切换至目标小区。
524、WD向目标基站发送第二切换确认。
其中，为了可以使得目标基站获知WD已成功切换至目标小区，在WD的侧链接资源更新完成之后，WD可以向目标基站发送用于通知已成功切换至目标小区的第二切换确认。
525、目标基站接收WD发送的第二切换确认。
其中，目标基站在接收到WD发送的第二切换确认之后，可以根据接收到的第二切换确认确定WD已成功切换至目标小区。
需要说明的是，在本发明实施例中，步骤522-步骤523，与步骤524-步骤525的执行没有先后关系，即可以先执行步骤522-步骤523，然后再执行步骤524-步骤525，或者，也可以先执行步骤524-步骤525，然后再执行步骤522-步骤523，本发明实施例在此对步骤522-步骤523，与步骤524-步骤525的执行顺序不做具体限制。
在执行完步骤501-步骤525之后，UE与目标基站的上行数据通道，以及WD与目标基站的上行数据通道已建立成功，但是下行数据通道尚未建立，S-GW只能通过源基站才可以将下行数据发送至目标基站，以便目标基站将下行数据发送至UE和WD，此时，为了使得下行数据能够直接由SGW发送至目标基站，可以执行以下步骤 526-步骤537：
526、目标基站向MME发送第一路径转换请求。
其中，在目标基站根据接收到的第一切换确认，确定出UE已成功切换至目标小区之后，目标基站可以向MME发送UE的路径转换请求(Path Switch Request)，即第一路径转换请求，该第一路径转换请求中可以包括：目标基站的标识、需要修改的S1-U的EBI和UE ID，其中，目标基站标识可以为TEID，S1-U指的是目标基站和S-GW之间的连接。
527、MME接收目标基站发送的第一路径转换请求。
528、目标基站向MME发送第二路径转换请求。
其中，在目标基站根据接收到的第二切换确认，确定出WD已成功切换至目标小区之后，目标基站可以向MME发送WD的路径转换请求，即第二路径转换请求，该第二路径转换请求中可以包括：TEID、需要修改的S1-U的EBI和WD ID。
529、MME接收目标基站发送的第二路径转换请求。
需要说明的是，在本发明实施例中，步骤526-步骤527，与步骤528-步骤529的执行没有先后关系，即可以先执行步骤526-步骤527，然后再执行步骤528-步骤529，或者，也可以先执行步骤528-步骤529，然后再执行步骤526-步骤527，本发明实施例在此对步骤526-步骤527，与步骤528-步骤529的执行顺序不做具体限制。
530、MME根据第一路径转换请求和第二路径转换请求，向S-GW发送修改承载请求。
其中，修改承载请求(Modify Bearer Request)中可以包括：TEID和需要修改的S1-U的EBI。在MME接收到目标基站发送的第一路径转换请求和第二路径转换请求之后，MME可以将第一路径切换请求和第二路径切换请求中包括的TEID和需要修改的S1-U的EBI携带在修改承载请求中发送至S-GW。
531、S-GW接收MME发送的修改承载请求，并根据修改承载请求修改承载。
其中，在S-GW接收到MME发送的修改承载请求之后，可以根据修改承载请求中包括的TEID，确定出待发送至UE或WD的下行数据，需目标基站转发，而不是源基站转发，即当SGW有下行数据需发送至UE或WD时，将该下行数据发送至目标基站。且S-GW根据修改承载请求中包括的需要修改的S1-U的EBI进行承载的修改，具体的可以修改发送下行数据的物理通道，即S-GW可以将第一物理通道(该第一物理通道为S-GW向源基站发送下行数据的通道)修改为第二物理通道(该第二物理通道为S-GW向目标基站发送下行数据的通道)。
532、S-GW向MME发送修改承载回复。
其中，在S-GW接收到MME发送的修改承载请求，并根据修改承载请求对承载进行修改之后，S-GW可以向MME发送修改承载回复(Modify Bearer Response)。
533、MME接收S-GW发送的修改承载回复。
534、MME向目标基站发送路径转换确认。
其中，在MME接收到S-GW发送的修改承载回复之后，MME可以向目标基站发送路径转换确认(Path Switch Ack)。
535、目标基站接收MME发送的路径转换确认。
536、目标基站向源基站发送Iu释放命令。
537、源基站接收目标基站发送的Iu释放命令。
其中，源基站在接收到目标基站发送的Iu释放命令(Iu Release Command)之后，可以释放UE和WD的相关资源。
本发明实施例提供的移动性管理方法，源基站确定出WD需进行切换，并根据WD获得的信号质量指示确定WD和UE需进行共同切换。并可以在确定出WD和UE需共同切换到的小区，即第一目标小区之后，通过向与该第一目标小区对应的第一目标基站发送包括有第一中继指示的第一切换请求，使得第一目标基站可以根据第一中继指示对WD和UE执行共同切换的操作。由于WD和UE可以进行共同切换，因此WD和UE之间的侧链接无需断开，从而 使得WD进行切换时，无需执行将与源基站的间接连接转换为与源基站的直接连接的操作，进而解决了WD和UE一起移动的过程中，被当前基站分别执行切换操作导致的WD的电量消耗严重，网络侧的处理负担加重的问题。
并且，源基站在根据UE的测量报告中包括的UE获得的信号质量指示，以及WD的测量报告中包括的WD获得的信号质量指示共同确定出WD和UE需进行共同切换，才确定WD和UE需进行共同切换，这样确保了WD和UE共同切换的准确性，且源基站通过向第一目标基站发送还包括有UE的上下文和WD的上下文的第一切换请求，进一步的减少了第一目标基站的处理负担。
图6为本发明实施例提供的另一种移动性管理方法的流程图，在WD通过UE(其中UE和WD当前驻留在同一小区中)间接连接到网络，同时与网络直接连接，且WD当前有业务正在传输的场景下，若UE和WD一起移动，则可能出现当前驻留小区无法满足WD的业务需求的情况，此时，为了保证WD的业务连续性，且为了尽可能的减小WD的电量消耗，UE和WD可以共同切换到另一个可以满足WD的业务需求的小区，以便通过该小区继续为WD提供服务。如图6所示，该方法可以包括：
601、源基站向UE发送第一测量控制信令。
其中，第一测量控制信令中可以包括：第一测量门限和第二测量门限。
602、UE接收源基站发送的第一测量控制信令。
603、UE向源基站发送第一测量报告。
其中，在第一种可能的实现方式中，该第一测量报告中可以包括：SLI、UE测量得到的当前驻留小区的信号质量、第三相邻小区组中的每个第一相邻小区的信号质量和标识、侧链接信号强度，以及第一指示；在第二种可能的实现方式中，该第一测量报告中可以包括：SLI、UE测量得到的当前驻留小区的信号质量、第三相邻小区组中的每个第一相邻小区的信号质量和标识，以及第二指示。
604、源基站向WD发送第二测量控制信令。
其中，第二测量控制信令中可以包括：第一测量门限和第三测量门限。
605、WD接收源基站发送的第二测量控制信令。
606、WD向源基站发送第二测量报告。
其中，在第一种可能的实现方式中，该第二测量报告中可以包括：WD测量得到的当前驻留小区的信号质量、第四相邻小区组中的每个第二相邻小区的信号质量和标识、侧链接信号强度，以及第一指示；在第二种可能的实现方式中，该第二测量报告中可以包括：WD测量得到的当前驻留小区的信号质量、第四相邻小区组中的每个第二相邻小区的信号质量和标识，以及第二指示。
需要说明的是，在本发明实施例中，步骤601-步骤603，与步骤604-步骤606的执行没有先后关系，即可以先执行步骤601-步骤603，然后再执行步骤604-步骤606，或者，也可以先执行步骤604-步骤606，然后再执行步骤601-步骤603，本发明实施例在此对步骤601-步骤603，与步骤604-步骤606的执行顺序不做具体限制。
607、源基站接收UE发送的第一测量报告，并接收WD发送的第二测量报告。
608、源基站根据第一测量报告和第二测量报告，确定UE和WD需要进行共同切换，并确定目标小区。
609、源基站向与目标小区对应的目标基站发送第一切换请求。
其中，在源基站根据第一测量报告和第二测量报告，确定出UE和WD需要进行共同切换，并确定出目标小区之后，源基站可以通过X2接口向与目标小区对应的目标基站发送UE的切换请求，即第一切换请求，该第一切换请求中可以包括：中继指示和UE的上下文，UE的上下文中可以包括第一RRC上下文(第一RRC上下文中可以包括RB ID)、L2 ID、SLI、SLI和L2 ID的对应关系以及SLI和RB ID的对应关系，其中，RB ID为UE和源基站之间的数据无线承载的标识，L2 ID为源基站为WD分配的标识，SLI为WD和 UE之间的侧链接的标识。
610、目标基站接收源基站发送的第一切换请求。
其中，目标基站可以通过X2接口接收源基站发送的第一切换请求。
611、源基站向与目标小区对应的目标基站发送第二切换请求。
其中，在源基站根据第一测量报告和第二测量报告，确定出UE和WD需要进行共同切换，并确定出目标小区之后，源基站可以向与目标小区对应的目标基站发送WD的切换请求，即第二切换请求，该第二切换请求中可以包括：中继指示和WD的上下文，WD的上下文中可以包括第二RRC上下文，第二RRC上下文中可以包括EBI，该EBI为WD和核心网之间的EPS承载的标识。
612、目标基站接收源基站发送的第二切换请求。
其中，目标基站可以通过X2接口接收源基站发送的第二切换请求。
需要说明的是，在本发明实施例中，步骤609-步骤610，与步骤611-步骤612的执行没有先后关系，即在执行完步骤608之后，可以先执行步骤609-步骤610，然后再执行步骤611-步骤612，或者，也可以先执行步骤611-步骤612，然后再执行步骤609-步骤610，本发明实施例在此对步骤609-步骤610，与步骤611-步骤612的执行顺序不做具体限制。
613、目标基站根据第一切换请求和第二切换请求，复用UE的上下文和WD的上下文，并分配传输业务数据的资源、PC5无线资源和接入资源。
其中，接入资源可以包括：第一标识、第二标识、第一前导码、第二前导码。
614、目标基站向源基站发送第一切换请求确认。
其中，在目标基站根据切换请求，复用了UE的上下文和WD的上下文，并分配了传输业务数据的资源、PC5无线资源和接入资源之后，目标基站可以向源基站发送UE的切换请求确认，即第一 切换请求确认。该第一切换请求确认中可以包括：中继指示和第一切换命令，其中，第一切换命令包括在第一信息中，第一信息具体的可以是第一Target to source transparent container，该第一切换命令中可以包括第一标识、第一前导码和PC5无线资源。
615、源基站接收目标基站发送的第一切换请求确认。
616、目标基站向源基站发送第二切换请求确认。
其中，在目标基站根据切换请求，复用了UE的上下文和WD的上下文，并分配了传输业务数据的资源、PC5无线资源和接入资源之后，目标基站可以向源基站发送WD的切换请求确认，即第二切换请求确认。该第二切换请求确认中可以包括：中继指示和第二切换命令，其中，第二切换命令包括在第二信息中，第二信息具体的可以是第二Target to source transparent container，该第二切换命令中可以包括第二标识、第二前导码和PC5无线资源。
617、源基站接收目标基站发送的第二切换请求确认。
需要说明的是，在本发明实施例中，步骤614-步骤615，与步骤616-步骤617的执行没有先后关系，即在执行完步骤613之后，可以先执行步骤614-步骤615，然后再执行步骤616-步骤617，或者，也可以先执行步骤616-步骤617，然后再执行步骤614-步骤615，本发明实施例在此对步骤614-步骤615，与步骤616-步骤617的执行顺序不做具体限制。
618、源基站将第一切换请求确认中包括的第一切换命令发送至UE。
619、UE接收源基站发送的第一切换命令。
620、UE根据第一切换命令断开与源基站的连接，并接入目标基站。
621、源基站将第二切换请求确认中包括的第二切换命令发送至WD。
622、WD接收源基站发送的第二切换命令。
需要说明的是，在本发明实施例中，步骤618-步骤619，与步 骤621-步骤622的执行没有先后关系，即可以先执行步骤618-步骤619，然后再执行步骤621-步骤622，或者，也可以先执行步骤621-步骤622，然后再执行步骤618-步骤619，本发明实施例在此对步骤618-步骤619，与步骤621-步骤622的执行顺序不做具体限制。
623、WD根据第二切换命令断开与源基站的连接，并接入目标基站。
624、UE根据第一切换命令中包括的PC5无线资源更新侧链接资源。
625、WD根据第二切换命令中包括的PC5无线资源更新侧链接资源。
需要说明的是，为了实现WD和UE的共同切换，且为了确保WD的业务连续性，在本发明实施例中，优选的，步骤620和步骤623可以同时执行，步骤624和步骤625也可以同时执行。
626、UE向目标基站发送第一切换确认。
627、目标基站接收UE发送的第一切换确认。
628、WD向目标基站发送第二切换确认。
629、目标基站接收WD发送的第二切换确认。
在执行完步骤601-步骤629之后，UE与目标基站的上行数据通道，以及WD与目标基站的上行数据通道已建立成功，但是下行数据通道尚未建立，S-GW只能通过源基站才可以将下行数据发送至目标基站，以便目标基站将下行数据发送至UE和WD，此时，为了使得下行数据能够直接由SGW发送至目标基站，可以执行以下步骤630-步骤641：
需要说明的是，在本发明实施例中，步骤626-步骤627，与步骤628-步骤629的执行没有先后关系，即可以先执行步骤626-步骤627，然后再执行步骤628-步骤629，或者，也可以先执行步骤628-步骤629，然后再执行步骤626-步骤627，本发明实施例在此对步骤626-步骤627，与步骤628-步骤629的执行顺序不做具体限制。
630、目标基站向MME发送第一路径转换请求。
其中，该第一路径转换请求中可以包括：目标基站的标识、需要修改的S1-U的EBI和UE ID，目标基站标识可以为TEID，S1-U指的是目标基站和S-GW之间的连接。
631、MME接收目标基站发送的第一路径转换请求。
632、目标基站向MME发送第二路径转换请求。
其中，该第二路径转换请求中可以包括：TEID、需要修改的S1-U的EBI和WD ID。
633、MME接收目标基站发送的第二路径转换请求。
需要说明的是，在本发明实施例中，步骤630-步骤631，与步骤632-步骤633的执行没有先后关系，即可以先执行步骤630-步骤631，然后再执行步骤632-步骤633，或者，也可以先执行步骤632-步骤633，然后再执行步骤630-步骤631，本发明实施例在此对步骤630-步骤631，与步骤632-步骤633的执行顺序不做具体限制。
634、MME根据第一路径转换请求和第二路径转换请求，向S-GW发送修改承载请求。
其中，修改承载请求中可以包括：TEID和需要修改的S1-U的EBI。在MME接收到目标基站发送的第一路径转换请求和第二路径转换请求之后，MME可以将第一路径切换请求和第二路径切换请求中包括的TEID和需要修改的S1-U的EBI携带在修改承载请求中发送至S-GW。
635、S-GW接收MME发送的修改承载请求，并根据修改承载请求修改承载。
636、S-GW向MME发送修改承载回复。
637、MME接收S-GW发送的修改承载回复。
638、MME向目标基站发送路径转换确认。
639、目标基站接收MME发送的路径转换确认。
640、目标基站向源基站发送Iu释放命令。
641、源基站接收目标基站发送的Iu释放命令。
需要说明的是，本发明实施例中步骤601-步骤641的具体描述 与本发明另一实施例中步骤501-步骤537中相应步骤的具体描述类似，对于本发明实施例中步骤601-步骤641的具体描述可以参考另一实施例中步骤501-步骤537中相应步骤的具体描述，本发明实施例在此不再一一赘述。
本发明实施例提供的移动性管理方法，源基站确定出WD需进行切换，并根据WD获得的信号质量指示确定WD和UE需进行共同切换。并可以在确定出WD和UE需共同切换到的小区，即第一目标小区之后，通过向与该第一目标小区对应的第一目标基站发送包括有第一中继指示的第一切换请求，使得第一目标基站可以根据第一中继指示对WD和UE执行共同切换的操作。由于WD和UE可以进行共同切换，因此WD和UE之间的侧链接无需断开，从而使得WD进行切换时，无需执行将与源基站的间接连接转换为与源基站的直接连接的操作，进而解决了WD和UE一起移动的过程中，被当前基站分别执行切换操作导致的WD的电量消耗严重，网络侧的处理负担加重的问题。
并且，源基站在根据UE的测量报告中包括的UE获得的信号质量指示，以及WD的测量报告中包括的WD获得的信号质量指示共同确定出WD和UE需进行共同切换，才确定WD和UE需进行共同切换，这样确保了WD和UE共同切换的准确性，且源基站通过向第一目标基站发送还包括有UE的上下文和WD的上下文的第一切换请求，进一步的减少了第一目标基站的处理负担。
图7为本发明实施例提供的另一种移动性管理方法的流程图，在WD通过UE(其中UE和WD当前驻留在同一小区中)间接连接到网络，同时与网络直接连接，且WD当前有业务正在传输的场景下，若UE和WD一起移动，则可能出现当前驻留小区无法满足WD的业务需求的情况，此时，为了保证WD的业务连续性，且为了尽可能的减小WD的电量消耗，WD可以切换到另一个可以满足其业务需求的小区，以便通过该小区继续为WD提供服务。如图7所示，该方法可以包括：
701、源基站向WD发送第二测量控制信令。
其中，第二测量控制信令中可以包括：第一测量门限和第三测量门限。
702、WD接收源基站发送的第二测量控制信令。
703、WD向源基站发送第二测量报告。
其中，在WD接收到源基站发送的第二测量控制信令之后，若WD发生移动，则可以对当前驻留小区的信号质量和第二相邻小区组中的每个第二相邻小区的信号质量进行测量，并根据接收到的第二测量控制信令中包括的第一测量门限判断当前驻留小区的信号质量是否满足当前的业务需求，根据第二测量控制信令中包括的第三测量门限判断每个第二相邻小区的信号质量是否满足当前的业务需求，当WD确定出当前驻留小区的信号质量低于第一测量门限，即表明当前驻留小区的信号质量无法满足当前的业务需求，且确定出第二相邻小区组中存在第二相邻小区的信号质量高于第三测量门限，即表明存在第二相邻小区的信号质量能够满足当前的业务需求时，WD便可以向源基站发送第二测量报告。
在第一种可能的实现方式中，该第二测量报告中可以包括：WD测量得到的当前驻留小区的信号质量、第四相邻小区组中的每个第二相邻小区的信号质量和标识、侧链接信号强度，以及第一指示；在第二种可能的实现方式中，该第二测量报告中可以包括：WD测量得到的当前驻留小区的信号质量、第四相邻小区组中的每个第二相邻小区的信号质量和标识，以及第二指示。
需要说明的是，第二测量报告中包括的参数的具体描述与本发明另一实施例中步骤503中的第一测量报告中包括的参数的具体描述类似，对于第二测量报告中包括的参数的具体描述可以参考本发明另一实施例步骤503中对第一测量报告中包括的相应参数的具体描述，本发明实施例在此不再一一赘述。
当该第二测量报告中包括侧链接信号强度和第一指示时，示例性的，假设WD向源基站发送的第二测量报告中包括的侧链接信号 强度低于阈值，第一指示为1，两者用来指示UE和WD之间的侧链接的信号质量情况不满足共同切换的条件。
当该第二测量报告中包括第二指示时，示例性的，假设WD向源基站发送的第二测量报告中包括的第二指示为11，即侧链接的信号质量低于阈值，且侧链接的信号质量正在变差，其用来指示UE和WD之间的侧链接的信号质量情况不满足共同切换的条件。
704、源基站接收WD发送的第二测量报告。
705、源基站根据第二测量报告，确定WD需要进行单独切换，且删除UE和WD的关联关系，并确定目标小区。
其中，目标小区指的是WD需要单独切换到的当前驻留小区的相邻小区。对应于步骤703中的第二测量报告的第一种可能的实现方式，在源基站接收到WD发送的第二测量报告之后，源基站可以判断第二测量报告中包括的WD测量得到的当前驻留小区的信号质量是否低于第一测量门限，并判断第二测量报告中包括的第四相邻小区组中的每个第二相邻小区的信号质量是否高于第三测量门限，然后根据判断得到的当前驻留小区的信号质量低于第一测量门限，第四相邻小区组中的每个第二相邻小区的信号质量高于第三测量门限，确定出该WD需要进行切换，且源基站可以根据第二测量报告中包括的侧链接信号强度和第一指示，判断UE和WD之间的侧链接的信号质量情况是否满足共同切换的条件，从而可以根据UE和WD之间的侧链接的信号质量情况是否满足共同切换的条件，确定UE和WD是否需要进行共同切换。示例性的，按照步骤703中的例子，源基站可以根据第二测量报告中包括的侧链接信号强度低于阈值，第一指示为1，确定出UE和WD之间的侧链接的信号质量情况不满足共同切换的条件，此时，源基站便可以根据得到的UE和WD之间的侧链接的信号质量情况不满足共同切换的条件，确定出WD需要进行单独切换。
对应于步骤703中的第二测量报告的第二种可能的实现方式，在源基站接收到WD发送的第二测量报告之后，源基站可以判断第 二测量报告中包括的WD测量得到的当前驻留小区的信号质量是否低于第一测量门限，并判断第二测量报告中包括的第四相邻小区组中的每个第二相邻小区的信号质量是否高于第三测量门限，然后根据判断得到的当前驻留小区的信号质量低于第一测量门限，第四相邻小区组中的每个第二相邻小区的信号质量高于第三测量门限，确定出该WD需要进行切换，且源基站可以根据第二测量报告中包括的第二指示，判断UE和WD之间的侧链接的信号质量情况是否满足共同切换的条件，从而可以根据UE和WD之间的侧链接的信号质量情况是否满足共同切换的条件，确定UE和WD是否需要进行共同切换。示例性的，按照步骤703中的例子，源基站可以根据第二测量报告中包括的第二指示为11，即侧链接的信号质量低于阈值，侧链接的信号质量正在变差，确定出UE和WD之间的侧链接的信号质量情况不满足共同切换的条件。此时，源基站便可以根据得到的UE和WD之间的侧链接的信号质量情况不满足共同切换的条件，确定出WD需要进行单独切换。
在源基站根据第二测量报告确定出WD需要进行单独切换之后，源基站可以确定需要指示UE和WD断开两者之间的侧链接，进一步的，源基站确定需要分别向UE和WD发送一指示信息，用于指示断开UE和WD之间的侧链接。且源基站可以删除UE和WD的关联关系，具体的为删除UE的上下文中包括的SLI、L2 ID、SLI和L2 ID的对应关系以及SLI和RB ID的对应关系，以及UE的上下文中该WD(该WD为接受UE中继的设备)的ID，还可以删除WD的上下文中该UE(该UE是为WD提供中继服务的设备)的ID。源基站还可以根据第二测量报告中包括的第四相邻小区组中的每个第二相邻小区的信号质量和标识，从第四相邻小区组中选择出WD测量得到的信号质量最好的相邻小区作为目标小区，以便于将WD单独切换到该目标小区。
706、源基站向与目标小区对应的目标基站发送第二切换请求。
其中，在源基站根据第二测量报告，确定出WD需要进行单独 切换，且删除了UE和WD的关联关系，并确定出目标小区之后，源基站可以通过X2接口向与目标小区对应的目标基站发送第二切换请求，该第二切换请求中可以包括：WD的上下文，WD的上下文中可以包括第二RRC上下文，该第二RRC上下文中可以包括EBI，该EBI为WD和核心网之间的EPS承载的标识。
707、目标基站接收源基站发送的第二切换请求。
其中，目标基站可以通过X2接口接收源基站发送的第二切换请求。
708、目标基站根据第二切换请求，为WD分配新的DRB相关资源，并分配接入资源和传输业务数据的资源。
其中，由于第二切换请求中包括的第二RRC上下文中没有DRB的相关资源，因此在目标基站接收到源基站发送的第二切换请求后，目标基站可以为WD分配新的DRB相关资源，并可以分配接入资源，接入资源可以包括：第二标识和第二前导码，且目标基站可以根据第二切换请求中包括的WD的上下文，为WD的单独切换分配并预留传输业务数据的资源。
709、目标基站向源基站发送第二切换请求确认。
其中，第二切换请求确认中可以包括第二切换命令，该第二切换命令中可以包括第二标识、第二前导码。
710、源基站接收目标基站发送的第二切换请求确认。
711、源基站向WD发送第二RRC链接重配。
其中，在源基站接收到目标基站发送的第二切换请求确认之后，源基站可以将第二切换请求确认中包括的第二切换命令，以及步骤705中所述的指示信息一同携带在第二RRC链接重配中发送至WD。
712、WD接收源基站发送的第二RRC链接重配。
713、WD根据第二RRC链接重配断开和UE的连接，删除EBI和SLI的对应关系，且断开与源基站的连接，并接入目标基站。
其中，在WD接收到源基站发送的第二RRC链接重配之后，WD可以根据第二RRC链接重配中包括的指示信息断开和UE的连 接，并删除EBI和SLI的对应关系，且可以根据第二切换命令断开与源基站的连接，与目标基站进行同步，并根据第二切换命令中包括的第二前导码接入目标基站，并在接入目标基站时携带第二标识，以便于目标基站根据第二标识确定出接入目标基站的是WD，且根据步骤708中的为WD分配的新的DRB相关资源，建立目标基站与WD之间的DRB。
714、WD向目标基站发送第二切换确认。
715、目标基站接收WD发送的第二切换确认。
在执行完步骤701-步骤715之后，WD与目标基站的上行数据通道已建立成功，但是下行数据通道尚未建立，S-GW只能通过源基站才可以将下行数据发送至目标基站，以便目标基站将下行数据发送至WD，此时，为了使得下行数据能够直接由SGW发送至目标基站，可以执行以下步骤716-步骤726：
716、目标基站向MME发送第二路径转换请求。
其中，在目标基站根据接收到的第二切换确认，确定出WD已成功切换至目标小区之后，目标基站可以向MME发送WD的路径转换请求，即第二路径转换请求，该第二路径转换请求中可以包括：TEID、需要修改的S1-U的EBI、WD ID和直接路径转换指示(Direct Path Switch Indicator)。直接路径转换指示用来通知MME，WD已断开和UE的连接。
717、MME接收目标基站发送的第二路径转换请求。
718、MME根据第二路径转换请求，删除UE的上下文中的WD ID，以及WD的上下文中的UE ID。
其中，在MME接收到目标基站发送的第二路径转换请求之后，MME可以根据第二路径转换请求中包括的直接路径转换指示，删除UE的上下文中该WD(该WD为接受UE中继的设备)的ID，还可以删除WD的上下文中该UE(该UE是为WD提供中继服务的设备)的ID。
719、MME根据第二路径转换请求，向S-GW发送修改承载请 求。
其中，修改承载请求中可以包括：TEID和需要修改的S1-U的EBI。在MME根据第二路径转换请求，删除了UE的上下文中的WD ID，以及WD的上下文中的UE ID之后，MME可以将第二路径切换请求中包括的TEID和需要修改的S1-U的EBI携带在修改承载请求中发送至S-GW。
720、S-GW接收MME发送的修改承载请求，并根据修改承载请求修改承载。
其中，在S-GW接收到MME发送的修改承载请求之后，可以根据修改承载请求中包括的TEID，确定出待发送至WD的下行数据，需目标基站转发，而不是源基站转发，即当SGW有下行数据需发送至WD时，将该下行数据发送至目标基站。且S-GW根据修改承载请求中包括的需要修改的S1-U的EBI进行承载的修改，具体的可以修改发送下行数据的物理通道，即S-GW可以将第一物理通道(该第一物理通道为S-GW向源基站发送下行数据的通道)修改为第二物理通道(该第二物理通道为S-GW向目标基站发送下行数据的通道)。
721、S-GW向MME发送修改承载回复。
其中，在S-GW接收到MME发送的修改承载请求，并根据修改承载请求修改承载之后，S-GW可以向MME发送修改承载回复。
722、MME接收S-GW发送的修改承载回复。
723、MME向目标基站发送路径转换确认。
724、目标基站接收MME发送的路径转换确认。
725、目标基站向源基站发送Iu释放命令。
726、源基站接收目标基站发送的Iu释放命令。
其中，源基站在接收到目标基站发送的Iu释放命令之后，可以根据Iu释放命令，释放WD的相关资源。
727、源基站向UE发送第一RRC链接重配。
其中，在源基站将WD的相关资源释放之后，源基站可以将步 骤705中所述的指示信息，以及配置参数携带在第一RRC链接重配中发送至UE，该配置参数用于UE将UE和源基站之间的连接配置恢复到UE为WD中继之前的连接配置。
728、UE接收源基站发送的第一RRC链接重配。
729、UE根据第一RRC链接重配，断开和WD的连接，删除SLI和L2 ID的对应关系以及SLI和RB ID的对应关系。
其中，在UE接收到源基站发送的第一RRC链接重配之后，UE可以根据第一RRC链接重配中包括的指示信息，断开和WD的连接，并删除SLI和L2 ID的对应关系以及SLI和RB ID的对应关系。另外，UE还可以根据第一RRC链接重配中包括的配置参数，将自身和源基站之间的连接配置恢复到自身为WD中继之前的连接配置。
730、UE向源基站发送RRC链接重配完成。
其中，在UE根据第一RRC链接重配，断开了和WD的连接，删除了SLI和L2 ID的对应关系以及SLI和RB ID的对应关系之后，UE可以向源基站发送RRC链接重配完成(RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete)。
731、源基站接收UE发送的RRC链接重配完成。
其中，源基站在接收到UE发送的RRC链接重配完成之后，可以释放侧链接资源。
需要说明的是，本发明实施例中步骤701-步骤731的具体描述与本发明另一实施例中步骤501-步骤537中相应步骤的具体描述类似，对于本发明实施例中步骤701-步骤731的具体描述可以参考另一实施例中步骤501-步骤537中相应步骤的具体描述，本发明实施例在此不再一一赘述。
本发明实施例提供的移动性管理方法，源基站可以根据接收到的第二测量报告确定出WD需进行切换，并根据WD获得的信号质量指示确定WD需进行单独切换，并可以在确定出WD需单独切换到的小区，即第二目标小区之后，向与该第二目标小区对应的第二目标基站发送包括有WD的上下文的第二切换请求。由于WD进行 单独切换时，无需执行将与源基站的间接连接转换为与源基站的直接连接的操作，因此解决了WD的电量消耗严重，网络侧的处理负担加重的问题。
图8为本发明实施例提供的另一种移动性管理方法的流程图，在WD通过UE(其中UE和WD当前驻留在同一小区中)间接连接到网络，同时与网络直接连接，且WD当前有业务正在传输的场景下，若UE和WD一起移动，则可能出现当前驻留小区无法满足UE的业务需求的情况，此时，为了保证UE的业务连续性，UE可以切换到另一个可以满足其业务需求的小区，以便通过该小区继续为UE提供服务。如图8所示，该方法可以包括：
801、源基站向UE发送第一测量控制信令。
其中，第一测量控制信令中可以包括：第一测量门限和第二测量门限。
802、UE接收源基站发送的第一测量控制信令。
803、UE向源基站发送第一测量报告。
其中，在UE接收到源基站发送的第一测量控制信令之后，若UE发生移动，则可以对当前驻留小区的信号质量和第一相邻小区组中的每个第一相邻小区的信号质量进行测量，并根据接收到的第一测量控制信令中包括的第一测量门限判断当前驻留小区的信号质量是否满足当前的业务需求，根据第一测量控制信令中包括的第二测量门限判断每个第一相邻小区的信号质量是否满足当前的业务需求，当UE确定出当前驻留小区的信号质量低于第一测量门限，即表明当前驻留小区的信号质量无法满足当前的业务需求，且确定出第一相邻小区组中存在第一相邻小区的信号质量高于第二测量门限，即表明存在第一相邻小区的信号质量能够满足当前的业务需求时，UE便可以向源基站发送第一测量报告。
在第一种可能的实现方式中，该第一测量报告中可以包括：SLI，UE测量得到的当前驻留小区的信号质量、第三相邻小区组中的每个第一相邻小区的信号质量和标识、侧链接信号强度，以及第 一指示；在第二种可能的实现方式中，该第一测量报告中可以包括：SLI，UE测量得到的当前驻留小区的信号质量、第三相邻小区组中的每个第一相邻小区的信号质量和标识，以及第二指示。
需要说明的是，第一测量报告中包括的参数的具体描述与本发明另一实施例中步骤503中的第一测量报告中包括的参数的具体描述类似，对于第一测量报告中包括的参数的具体描述可以参考本发明另一实施例步骤503中对第一测量报告中包括的相应参数的具体描述，本发明实施例在此不再一一赘述。
当该第一测量报告中包括侧链接信号强度和第一指示时，示例性的，假设UE向源基站发送的第一测量报告中包括的侧链接信号强度低于阈值，第一指示为1，两者用来指示UE和WD之间的侧链接的信号质量情况不满足共同切换的条件，并根据UE和WD之间的侧链接的信号质量情况不满足共同切换的条件，确定出UE需要进行单独切换。
当该第一测量报告中包括第二指示时，示例性的，假设UE向源基站发送的第一测量报告中包括的第二指示为11，即侧链接的信号质量低于阈值，且侧链接的信号质量正在变差，其用来指示UE和WD之间的侧链接的信号质量情况不满足共同切换的条件。
804、源基站接收UE发送的第一测量报告。
805、源基站根据第一测量报告，确定UE需要进行单独切换，并删除UE和WD之间的关联关系，且为WD分配新的DRB相关资源，以及确定目标小区。
其中，目标小区指的是UE需要单独切换到的当前驻留小区的相邻小区。对应于步骤803中的第一测量报告的第一种可能的实现方式，在源基站接收到UE发送的第一测量报告之后，源基站可以判断第一测量报告中包括的UE测量得到的当前驻留小区的信号质量是否低于第一测量门限，并判断第一测量报告中包括的第三相邻小区组中的每个第一相邻小区的信号质量是否高于第二测量门限，然后根据判断得到的当前驻留小区的信号质量低于第一测量门限， 第三相邻小区组中的每个第一相邻小区的信号质量高于第二测量门限，确定出该UE需要进行切换，且源基站可以根据第一测量报告中包括的侧链接信号强度和第一指示，判断UE和WD之间的侧链接的信号质量情况是否满足共同切换的条件，从而可以根据UE和WD之间的侧链接的信号质量情况是否满足共同切换的条件，确定UE和WD是否需要进行共同切换。示例性的，按照步骤803中的例子，源基站可以根据第一测量报告中包括的侧链接信号强度低于阈值，第一指示为1，确定出UE和WD之间的侧链接的信号质量情况不满足共同切换的条件，此时，源基站便可以根据得到的UE和WD之间的侧链接的信号质量情况不满足共同切换的条件，确定出UE需要进行单独切换。
对应于步骤803中的第一测量报告的第二种可能的实现方式，在源基站接收到UE发送的第一测量报告之后，源基站可以判断第一测量报告中包括的UE测量得到的当前驻留小区的信号质量是否低于第一测量门限，并判断第一测量报告中包括的第三相邻小区组中的每个第一相邻小区的信号质量是否高于第二测量门限，然后根据判断得到的当前驻留小区的信号质量低于第一测量门限，第三相邻小区组中的每个第一相邻小区的信号质量高于第二测量门限，确定出该UE需要进行切换，且源基站可以根据第一测量报告中包括的第二指示，判断UE和WD之间的侧链接的信号质量情况是否满足共同切换的条件，从而可以根据UE和WD之间的侧链接的信号质量情况是否满足共同切换的条件，确定UE和WD是否需要进行共同切换。示例性的，按照步骤803中的例子，源基站可以根据第一测量报告中包括的第二指示为11，即侧链接的信号质量低于阈值，侧链接的信号质量正在变差，确定出UE和WD之间的侧链接的信号质量情况不满足共同切换的条件，此时，源基站便可以根据得到的UE和WD之间的侧链接的信号质量情况不满足共同切换的条件，确定出UE需要进行单独切换。
在源基站根据第二测量报告确定出UE需要进行单独切换之后， 源基站可以确定需要指示UE和WD断开两者之间的侧链接，进一步的，源基站确定需要分别向UE和WD发送一指示信息，用于指示断开UE和WD之间的侧链接。且源基站可以删除UE和WD的关联关系，具体的为删除UE的上下文中包括的SLI、L2 ID、SLI和L2 ID的对应关系以及SLI和RB ID的对应关系，以及UE的上下文中该WD(该WD为接受UE中继的设备)的ID，还可以删除WD的上下文中该UE(该UE是为WD提供中继服务的设备)的ID。源基站还可以为WD分配新的DRB相关资源，并根据第一测量报告中包括的第三相邻小区组中的每个第一相邻小区的信号质量和标识，从第三相邻小区组中选择出UE测量得到的信号质量最好的相邻小区作为目标小区，以便于将UE单独切换到该目标小区。
806、源基站向与目标小区对应的目标基站发送第一切换请求。
其中，在源基站根据第一测量报告，确定出UE需要进行单独切换，并删除了UE和WD的关联关系，且为WD分配了新的DRB相关配置，以及确定出目标小区之后，源基站可以通过X2接口向与目标小区对应的目标基站发送第一切换请求，该第一切换请求中可以包括：UE的上下文，UE的上下文中可以包括第一RRC上下文。
807、目标基站接收源基站发送的第一切换请求。
其中，目标基站可以通过X2接口接收源基站发送的切换请求。
808、目标基站根据第一切换请求，分配接入资源和传输业务数据的资源。
其中，由于第一切换请求中包括的UE的上下文中没有SLI和L2 ID的对应关系以及SLI和RB ID的对应关系，因此在目标基站接收到源基站发送的第一切换请求后，目标基站可以确定出此次切换为UE的单独切换，并可以分配接入资源，接入资源可以包括：第一标识和第一前导码，且目标基站可以根据第一切换请求中包括的UE的上下文，为UE的单独切换分配并预留传输业务数据的资源。
809、目标基站向源基站发送第一切换请求确认。
其中，第一切换请求确认中可以包括第一切换命令，该第一切 换命令中可以包括第一标识、第一前导码。
810、源基站接收目标基站发送的第一切换请求确认。
811、源基站向UE发送第一RRC链接重配。
其中，在源基站接收到目标基站发送的第一切换请求确认之后，源基站可以将第一切换请求确认中包括的第一切换命令，以及步骤805中所述的指示信息一同携带在第一RRC链接重配中发送至UE。
812、UE接收源基站发送的第一RRC链接重配。
813、源基站向WD发送第二RRC链接重配。
其中，源基站可以将步骤805中所述的指示信息携带在第二RRC链接重配中发送至WD。
814、WD接收源基站发送的第二RRC链接重配。
需要说明的是，在本发明实施例中，步骤811-步骤812，与步骤813-步骤814的执行没有先后关系，即在执行完步骤810之后，可以先执行步骤811-步骤812，然后再执行步骤813-步骤814，或者，也可以先执行步骤813-步骤814，然后再执行步骤811-步骤812，本发明实施例在此对步骤811-步骤812，与步骤813-步骤814的执行顺序不做具体限制。
815、WD根据第二RRC链接重配，断开和UE的连接，并删除EBI和SLI的对应关系，且建立WD和源基站之间的DRB。
其中，在WD接收到源基站发送的第二RRC链接重配之后，WD可以根据第二RRC链接重配中包括的指示信息，断开和UE的连接，并删除EBI和SLI的对应关系。另外，WD还可以根据步骤805中的为WD分配的新的DRB相关资源(步骤805中为WD分配的新的DRB相关资源可以由源基站携带到第二RRC连接重配中发送至WD)，建立WD和源基站之间的DRB，以使得将WD和源基站之间的连接配置恢复到WD接受UE中继之前的连接配置。
816、WD向源基站发送RRC链接重配完成。
其中，在WD根据第二RRC链接重配，断开了和UE的连接，并删除了EBI和SLI的对应关系，且建立了WD和源基站之间的DRB 之后，WD可以向源基站发送RRC链接重配完成。
817、源基站接收WD发送的RRC链接重配完成。
其中，源基站在接收到WD发送的RRC链接重配完成之后，可以释放侧链接资源。
818、UE根据第一RRC链接重配断开与WD的连接，删除SLI和L2 ID的对应关系以及SLI和RB ID的对应关系，且断开与源基站的连接，并接入目标基站。
其中，在执行完步骤812之后，即在UE接收到源基站发送的第一RRC链接重配之后，UE可以根据第一RRC链接重配中包括的指示信息，断开与WD的连接，并删除SLI和L2 ID的对应关系以及SLI和RB ID的对应关系，且可以根据第一切换命令断开与源基站的连接，与目标基站进行同步，并根据第一切换命令中包括的第一前导码接入目标基站，并在接入目标基站时携带第一标识，以便于目标基站根据第一标识确定出接入目标基站的是UE，并根据第一切换请求中包括的UE的上下文，建立目标基站与UE的直接连接。
819、UE向目标基站发送第一切换确认。
820、目标基站接收UE发送的第一切换确认。
在执行完步骤801-步骤820之后，UE与目标基站的上行数据通道已建立成功，但是下行数据通道尚未建立，S-GW只能通过源基站才可以将下行数据发送至目标基站，以便目标基站将下行数据发送至UE，此时，为了使得下行数据能够直接由SGW发送至目标基站，可以执行以下步骤821-步骤831：
821、目标基站向MME发送第一路径转换请求。
其中，在目标基站根据接收到的第一切换确认，确定出UE已成功切换至目标小区之后，目标基站可以向MME发送UE的路径转换请求，即第一路径转换请求，该第一路径转换请求中可以包括：TEID、需要修改的S1-U的EBI、UE ID和直接路径转换指示。直接路径转换指示用来通知MME，UE已断开和WD的连接。
822、MME接收目标基站发送的第一路径转换请求。
823、MME根据第一路径转换请求，删除UE的上下文中的WD ID，以及WD的上下文中的UE ID。
其中，在MME接收到目标基站发送的第一路径转换请求之后，MME可以根据第一路径转换请求中包括的直接路径转换指示，删除UE的上下文中该WD(该WD为接受UE中继的设备)的ID，还可以删除WD的上下文中该UE(该UE是为WD提供中继服务的设备)的ID。
824、MME根据第一路径转换请求，向S-GW发送修改承载请求。
其中，修改承载请求中可以包括：TEID和需要修改的S1-U的EBI。在MME根据第一路径转换请求，删除了UE的上下文中的WD ID，以及WD的上下文中的UE ID之后，MME可以将第一路径切换请求中包括的TEID和需要修改的S1-U的EBI携带在修改承载请求中发送至S-GW。
825、S-GW接收MME发送的修改承载请求，并根据修改承载请求修改承载。
其中，在S-GW接收到MME发送的修改承载请求之后，可以根据修改承载请求中包括的TEID，确定出待发送至UE的下行数据，需目标基站转发，而不是源基站转发，即当SGW有下行数据需发送至UE时，将该下行数据发送至目标基站。且S-GW根据修改承载请求中包括的需要修改的S1-U的EBI进行承载的修改，具体的可以修改发送下行数据的物理通道，即S-GW可以将第一物理通道(该第一物理通道为S-GW向源基站发送下行数据的通道)修改为第二物理通道(该第二物理通道为S-GW向目标基站发送下行数据的通道)。
826、S-GW向MME发送修改承载回复。
其中，在S-GW接收到MME发送的修改承载请求，并根据修改承载请求修改承载之后，S-GW可以向MME发送修改承载回复。
827、MME接收S-GW发送的修改承载回复。
828、MME向目标基站发送路径转换确认。
829、目标基站接收MME发送的路径转换确认。
830、目标基站向源基站发送Iu释放命令。
831、源基站接收目标基站发送的Iu释放命令。
其中，源基站在接收到目标基站发送的Iu释放命令之后，可以根据Iu释放命令，释放UE的相关资源。
需要说明的是，本发明实施例中步骤801-步骤831的具体描述与本发明另一实施例中步骤501-步骤537中相应步骤的具体描述类似，对于本发明实施例中步骤801-步骤831的具体描述可以参考另一实施例中步骤501-步骤537中相应步骤的具体描述，本发明实施例在此不再一一赘述。
上述主要从各个网元之间交互的角度对本发明实施例提供的方案进行了介绍。可以理解的是，各个网元，例如源基站、目标基站和WD为了实现上述功能，其包含了执行各个功能相应的硬件结构和/或软件模块。本领域技术人员应该很容易意识到，结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的算法步骤，本发明能够以硬件或硬件和计算机软件的结合形式来实现。某个功能究竟以硬件还是计算机软件驱动硬件的方式来执行，取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能，但是这种实现不应认为超出本发明的范围。
本发明实施例可以根据上述方法示例对源基站、目标基站和WD进行功能模块的划分，例如，可以对应各个功能划分各个功能模块，也可以将两个或两个以上的功能集成在一个处理模块中。上述集成的模块既可以采用硬件的形式实现，也可以采用软件功能模块的形式实现。需要说明的是，本发明实施例中对模块的划分是示意性的，仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分，实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式。
在采用对应各个功能划分各个功能模块的情况下，图9示出了上述和实施例中涉及的源基站的一种可能的组成示意图，如图9所 示，该源基站可以包括：接收单元91、确定单元92、发送单元93。
其中，接收单元91，用于支持源基站执行图4所示的移动性管理方法中的步骤403，图5所示的移动性管理方法中的步骤507、步骤513、步骤537，图6所示的移动性管理方法中的步骤607、步骤615、步骤617、步骤641，图7所示的移动性管理方法中的步骤704、步骤710、步骤726、步骤731，图8所示的移动性管理方法中的步骤804、步骤810、步骤817、步骤831。
确定单元92，用于支持源基站执行图4所示的移动性管理方法中的步骤404，图5所示的移动性管理方法中的步骤508，图6所示的移动性管理方法中的步骤608，图7所示的移动性管理方法中的步骤705所述的确定WD需要单独切换，并确定目标小区，图8所示的移动性管理方法中的步骤805所述的确定UE需要单独切换，并确定目标小区。
发送单元93，用于支持源基站执行图4所示的移动性管理方法中的步骤405，图5所示的移动性管理方法中的步骤501、步骤504、步骤509、步骤514、步骤517，图6所示的移动性管理方法中的步骤601、步骤604、步骤609、步骤611、步骤618、步骤621，图7所示的移动性管理方法中的步骤701、步骤706、步骤711、步骤727，图8所示的移动性管理方法中的步骤801、步骤806、步骤811、步骤813。
需要说明的是，上述方法实施例涉及的各步骤的所有相关内容均可以援引到对应功能模块的功能描述，在此不再赘述。
本发明实施例提供的源基站，用于执行上述移动性管理方法，因此可以达到与上述移动性管理方法相同的效果。
在采用集成的单元的情况下，图10示出了上述实施例中所涉及的源基站的另一种可能的组成示意图。如图10所示，该源基站包括：处理模块1001和通信模块1002。
处理模块1001用于对源基站的动作进行控制管理，例如，处理模块1001用于支持源基站执行图4中的步骤404、图5中的步骤508， 图6中的步骤608，图7中的步骤705所述的确定WD需要单独切换，并确定目标小区，图8中的步骤805所述的确定UE需要单独切换，并确定目标小区、和/或用于本文所描述的技术的其它过程。通信模块1002用于支持源基站与其他网络实体的通信，例如与图1或图3示出的网络实体之间或功能模块的通信。例如，通信模块1002用于支持源基站执行图4中的步骤403、步骤405，图5中的步骤501、步骤504、步骤507、步骤509、步骤513、步骤514、步骤517、步骤537，图6中的步骤步骤601、步骤604、607、步骤609、步骤611、步骤615、步骤617、步骤618、步骤621、步骤641，图7中的步骤701、步骤704、步骤706、步骤710、步骤711、步骤726、步骤727、步骤731，图8中的步骤801、步骤804、步骤806、步骤810、步骤811、步骤813、步骤817、步骤831。源基站还可以包括存储模块1003，用于存储源基站的程序代码和数据。
其中，处理模块1001可以是处理器或控制器。其可以实现或执行结合本发明公开内容所描述的各种示例性的逻辑方框，模块和电路。所述处理器也可以是实现计算功能的组合，例如包含一个或多个微处理器组合，DSP和微处理器的组合等等。通信模块1002可以是收发器、收发电路或通信接口等。存储模块1003可以是存储器。
当处理模块1001为处理器，通信模块1002为收发器，存储模块1003为存储器时，本发明实施例所涉及的源基站可以为图2所示的源基站。
在采用对应各个功能划分各个功能模块的情况下，图11示出了上述和实施例中涉及的目标基站的一种可能的组成示意图，如图11所示，该目标基站可以包括：接收单元1101、切换单元1102。
其中，接收单元1101，用于支持目标基站执行图4所示的移动性管理方法中的步骤406，图5所示的移动性管理方法中的步骤510、步骤523、步骤525、步骤535，图6所示的移动性管理方法中的步骤610、步骤612、步骤627、步骤629、步骤639，图7所示的移动性管理方法中的步骤707、步骤715、步骤724，图8所示的移动 性管理方法中的步骤807、步骤820、步骤829。
切换单元1102，用于支持目标基站执行图4所示的移动性管理方法中的步骤407。
在本发明实施例中，进一步的，如图12所示，该目标基站还可以包括：分配单元1103、发送单元1104。
分配单元1103，用于支持目标基站执行图5所示的移动性管理方法中的步骤511中所述的分配传输业务数据的资源、PC5无线资源和接入资源，图6所示的移动性管理方法中的步骤613中所述的分配传输业务数据的资源、PC5无线资源和接入资源，图7所示的移动性管理方法中的步骤708，图8所示的移动性管理方法中的步骤808。
发送单元1104，用于支持目标基站执行图5所示的移动性管理方法中的步骤512、步骤528、步骤536，图6所示的移动性管理方法中的步骤614、步骤616、步骤632、步骤640，图7所示的移动性管理方法中的步骤709、步骤716、步骤725，图8所示的移动性管理方法中的步骤809、步骤821、步骤830。
需要说明的是，上述方法实施例涉及的各步骤的所有相关内容均可以援引到对应功能模块的功能描述，在此不再赘述。
本发明实施例提供的目标基站，用于执行上述移动性管理方法，因此可以达到与上述移动性管理方法相同的效果。
在采用集成的单元的情况下，图13示出了上述实施例中所涉及的目标基站的另一种可能的组成示意图。如图13所示，该目标基站包括：处理模块1201和通信模块1202。
处理模块1201用于对目标基站的动作进行控制管理，例如，处理模块1201用于支持目标基站执行图5中的步骤511所述的分配传输业务数据的资源、PC5无线资源和接入资源，图6所示的移动性管理方法中的步骤613中所述的分配传输业务数据的资源、PC5无线资源和接入资源，图7所示的移动性管理方法中的步骤708，图8所示的移动性管理方法中的步骤808，和/或用于本文所描述的技术 的其它过程。通信模块1202用于支持目标基站与其他网络实体的通信，例如与图1或图3示出的网络实体之间或功能模块的通信。例如，通信模块1202用于支持目标基站执行图4中的步骤406，图5中的步骤510、步骤512、步骤523、步骤525、步骤528、步骤535、步骤536，图6中的步骤610、步骤612、步骤614、步骤616、步骤627、步骤629、步骤632、步骤639、步骤640，图7中的步骤707、步骤709、步骤715、步骤716、步骤724、步骤725，图8中的步骤807、步骤809、步骤820、步骤821、步骤829、步骤830。目标基站还可以包括存储模块1203，用于存储源基站的程序代码和数据。
其中，处理模块1201可以是处理器或控制器。其可以实现或执行结合本发明公开内容所描述的各种示例性的逻辑方框，模块和电路。所述处理器也可以是实现计算功能的组合，例如包含一个或多个微处理器组合，DSP和微处理器的组合等等。通信模块1202可以是收发器、收发电路或通信接口等。存储模块1203可以是存储器。
当处理模块1201为处理器，通信模块1202为收发器，存储模块1203为存储器时，本发明实施例所涉及的源基站可以为图2所示的目标基站。
在采用对应各个功能划分各个功能模块的情况下，图14示出了上述和实施例中涉及的WD的一种可能的组成示意图，如图14所示，该WD可以包括：测量单元1301、发送单元1302、接收单元1303、接入单元1304、更新单元1305。
其中，测量单元1301，用于支持WD执行图4所示的移动性管理方法中的步骤401。
发送单元1302，用于支持WD执行图4所示的移动性管理方法中的步骤402，图5所示的移动性管理方法中的步骤506、步骤524，图6所示的移动性管理方法中的步骤606、步骤628，图7所示的移动性管理方法中的步骤703、步骤714，图8所示的移动性管理方法中的步骤816。
接收单元1303，用于支持WD执行图5所示的移动性管理方法中的步骤504、步骤518，图6所示的移动性管理方法中的步骤605、步骤622，图7所示的移动性管理方法中的步骤702、步骤712，图8所示的移动性管理方法中的步骤814。
接入单元1304，用于支持WD执行图5所示的移动性管理方法中的步骤519所述的接入目标基站，图6所示的移动性管理方法中的步骤623所述的接入目标基站，图7所示的移动性管理方法中的步骤713所述的接入目标基站，图8所示的移动性管理方法中的步骤818所述的接入目标基站。
更新单元1305，用于支持WD执行图5所示的移动性管理方法中的步骤521，图6所示的移动性管理方法中的步骤625。
在本发明实施例中，进一步的，如图15所示，该WD还可以包括：断开单元1306、获取单元1307。
断开单元1306，用于支持WD执行图5所示的移动性管理方法中的步骤519所述的断开与源基站的连接，图6所示的移动性管理方法中的步骤623所述的断开与源基站的连接，图7所示的移动性管理方法中的步骤713所述的断开与源基站的连接，图8所示的移动性管理方法中的步骤815所述的断开和UE的连接、步骤818所述的接入目标基站。
获取单元1307，用于支持WD执行图5-图8所示的移动性管理方法中的获取侧链接信号强度和第一指示，或者第二指示。
需要说明的是，上述方法实施例涉及的各步骤的所有相关内容均可以援引到对应功能模块的功能描述，在此不再赘述。
本发明实施例提供的WD，用于执行上述移动性管理方法，因此可以达到与上述移动性管理方法相同的效果。
在采用集成的单元的情况下，图16示出了上述实施例中所涉及的WD的另一种可能的组成示意图。如图16所示，该WD包括：处理模块1401和通信模块1402。
处理模块1401用于对WD的动作进行控制管理，例如，处理模 块1401用于支持WD执行图4中的步骤401、图5中的步骤519所述的断开与源基站的连接，接入目标基站、步骤521，图6中的步骤623所述的接入目标基站、步骤625，图7中的步骤713所述的断开与源基站的连接，接入目标基站，图8中的步骤815所述的断开和UE的连接、步骤818所述的接入目标基站，和/或用于本文所描述的技术的其它过程。通信模块1402用于支持WD与其他网络实体的通信，例如与图1或图2示出的网络实体之间或功能模块的通信。例如，通信模块1402用于支持WD执行图4中的步骤402，图5中的步骤504、步骤506、步骤518、步骤524，图6中的步骤605、步骤606、步骤622、步骤628，图7所示的移动性管理方法中的步骤702、步骤703、步骤712、步骤714，图8所示的移动性管理方法中的步骤814、步骤816。WD还可以包括存储模块1403，用于存储源基站的程序代码和数据。
其中，处理模块1401可以是处理器或控制器。其可以实现或执行结合本发明公开内容所描述的各种示例性的逻辑方框，模块和电路。所述处理器也可以是实现计算功能的组合，例如包含一个或多个微处理器组合，DSP和微处理器的组合等等。通信模块1402可以是收发器、收发电路或通信接口等。存储模块1403可以是存储器。
当处理模块1401为处理器，通信模块1402为通信接口，存储模块1403为存储器时，本发明实施例所涉及的WD可以为图3所示的WD。
通过以上的实施方式的描述，所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到，为描述的方便和简洁，仅以上述各功能模块的划分进行举例说明，实际应用中，可以根据需要而将上述功能分配由不同的功能模块完成，即将装置的内部结构划分成不同的功能模块，以完成以上描述的全部或者部分功能。
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中，应该理解到，所揭露的装置和方法，可以通过其它的方式实现。例如，以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的，例如，所述模块或单元的划分，仅仅为一种逻 辑功能划分，实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式，例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个装置，或一些特征可以忽略，或不执行。另一点，所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口，装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接，可以是电性，机械或其它的形式。
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的，作为单元显示的部件可以是一个物理单元或多个物理单元，即可以位于一个地方，或者也可以分布到多个不同地方。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。
另外，在本发明各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中，也可以是各个单元单独物理存在，也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。上述集成的单元既可以采用硬件的形式实现，也可以采用软件功能单元的形式实现。
所述集成的单元如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时，可以存储在一个可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解，本发明的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的全部或部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来，该软件产品存储在一个存储介质中，包括若干指令用以使得一个设备(可以是单片机，芯片等)或处理器(processor)执行本发明各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括：U盘、移动硬盘、ROM、RAM、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。
以上所述，仅为本发明的具体实施方式，但本发明的保护范围并不局限于此，任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本发明揭露的技术范围内，可轻易想到变化或替换，都应涵盖在本发明的保护范围之内。因此，本发明的保护范围应以所述权利要求的保护范围为准。

Claims (37)

  1. 一种移动性管理方法，其特征在于，包括：
    源基站接收可穿戴设备WD发送的测量报告；所述WD与所述源基站直接连接，用于传输信令，并通过用户设备UE与所述源基站间接连接，用于传输用户面数据，所述WD发送的测量报告中包括：所述WD获得的信号质量指示，所述WD测量得到的当前驻留小区的信号质量，以及至少一个相邻小区的信号质量和标识，所述信号质量指示用于指示所述WD和所述UE之间的侧链接的信号质量，以及所述信号质量的恶化趋势；
    所述源基站在确定所述WD测量得到的当前驻留小区的信号质量低于第一测量门限，且确定每个所述相邻小区的信号质量高于第三测量门限时，确定所述WD需进行切换操作；
    所述源基站根据所述WD获得的信号质量指示确定所述WD和所述UE需进行共同切换；
    所述源基站根据所述WD发送的测量报告中包括的相邻小区的标识确定第一目标小区；所述第一目标小区为所述WD和所述UE需共同切换到的小区；
    所述源基站向与所述第一目标小区对应的第一目标基站发送第一切换请求，所述第一切换请求中包括第一中继指示，所述第一中继指示用于指示所述第一目标基站对所述WD和所述UE执行共同切换。
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，在所述源基站根据所述WD发送的测量报告中包括的相邻小区的标识确定第一目标小区之前，还包括：
    所述源基站接收所述UE发送的测量报告；所述UE发送的测量报告包括：所述UE获得的信号质量指示，所述UE测量得到的所述当前驻留小区的信号质量，以及至少一个相邻小区的信号质量；
    所述源基站在确定所述UE测量得到的所述当前驻留小区的信号质量低于所述第一测量门限，且确定每个所述相邻小区的信号质量高 于第二测量门限时，确定所述UE需进行切换操作；
    所述源基站根据所述WD获得的信号质量指示确定所述WD和所述UE需进行共同切换，包括：
    所述源基站根据所述WD获得的信号质量指示和所述UE获得的信号质量指示确定所述WD和所述UE需进行共同切换。
  3. 根据权利要求2所述的方法，其特征在于，当通过所述UE间接连接至所述源基站的WD存在至少两个时，所述UE发送的测量报告还包括：侧链接标识SLI，在确定所述WD和所述UE需进行共同切换之前，还包括：
    所述源基站从所述至少两个WD中确定与所述SLI对应的所述WD为需与所述UE共同切换的WD。
  4. 根据权利要求2或3所述的方法，其特征在于，所述UE发送的测量报告还包括：所述至少一个相邻小区的标识；
    所述源基站根据所述WD发送的测量报告中包括的相邻小区的标识确定第一目标小区，包括：
    所述源基站从所述WD发送的测量报告中包括的至少一个相邻小区和所述UE发送的测量报告中包括的至少一个相邻小区中，选择出备选小区组，所述备选小区组中包括至少一个备选小区；
    当所述备选小区组中包括一个备选小区时，所述源基站将该备选小区确定为所述第一目标小区；
    当所述备选小区组中包括至少两个备选小区时，所述源基站将所述至少两个备选小区中所述UE测量得到的信号质量最好的小区确定为所述第一目标小区。
  5. 根据权利要求1-4中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述第一切换请求中还包括：所述UE的上下文和所述WD的上下文；所述UE的上下文和所述WD的上下文用于所述第一目标基站为所述UE和所述WD分配接入所述第一目标基站所需的资源和PC5无线资源，所述PC5无线资源用于所述WD和所述UE更新所述WD和所述UE之间的侧链接资源。
  6. 根据权利要求5所述的方法，其特征在于，在所述源基站向与所述第一目标小区对应的第一目标基站发送第一切换请求之后，还包括：
    所述源基站接收所述第一目标基站发送的第一切换请求确认；其中，所述第一切换请求确认包括第二中继指示、第一切换命令和第二切换命令；所述第二中继指示用于通知所述源基站所述第一切换请求确认是针对所述UE和所述WD的共同切换的确认，所述第一切换命令包括所述UE接入所述第一目标基站所需的资源和所述PC5无线资源，所述第二切换命令包括所述WD接入所述第一目标基站所需的资源和所述PC5无线资源；
    所述源基站向所述UE发送所述第一切换命令，并向所述WD发送所述第二切换命令。
  7. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述源基站根据所述WD获得的信号质量指示确定所述WD需进行单独切换；
    所述源基站将所述WD发送的测量报告中包括的相邻小区中信号质量最好的小区确定为第二目标小区；所述第二目标小区为所述WD需单独切换到的小区；
    所述源基站向与所述第二目标小区对应的第二目标基站发送第二切换请求，所述第二切换请求中包括所述WD的上下文。
  8. 根据权利要求7所述的方法，其特征在于，在所述源基站向与所述第二目标小区对应的第二目标基站发送第二切换请求之后，还包括：
    所述源基站接收所述第二目标基站发送的第二切换请求确认；其中，所述第二切换请求确认包括所述WD接入所述第二目标基站所需的资源；
    所述源基站向所述WD发送第三切换命令和指示信息，所述第三切换命令包括所述WD接入所述第二目标基站所需的资源，所述指示信息用于指示所述WD断开与所述UE之间的侧链接。
  9. 根据权利要求2-8中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述源基站根据所述WD获得的信号质量指示和所述UE获得的信号质量指示确定所述WD和所述UE需进行共同切换，包括：
    所述源基站根据所述WD获得的侧链接信号强度和第一指示，以及所述UE获得所述侧链接信号强度和所述第一指示，确定所述WD和所述UE需进行共同切换，所述侧链接信号强度用于表示所述WD和所述UE之间的侧链接的信号质量，所述第一指示用于指示所述WD和所述UE之间的侧链接的信号质量的恶化趋势；或者，
    所述源基站根据所述WD获得的第二指示，以及所述UE获得所述第二指示，确定所述WD和所述UE需进行共同切换，所述第二指示用于指示所述WD和所述UE之间的侧链接的信号质量和所述WD和所述UE之间的侧链接的信号质量的恶化趋势。
  10. 一种移动性管理方法，其特征在于，包括：
    目标基站接收源基站发送的第一切换请求，所述第一切换请求中包括第一中继指示，所述第一中继指示用于指示所述目标基站对可穿戴设备WD和用户设备UE执行共同切换，所述WD与所述源基站直接连接，用于传输信令，并通过所述UE与所述源基站间接连接，用于传输用户面数据；
    所述目标基站根据所述第一切换请求对所述WD和所述UE执行共同切换。
  11. 根据权利要求10所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一切换请求中还包括：所述UE的上下文和所述WD的上下文，所述目标基站根据所述第一切换请求对所述WD和所述UE执行共同切换，包括：
    所述目标基站复用所述UE的上下文和所述WD的上下文，并根据所述UE的上下文和所述WD的上下文为所述UE和所述WD分配接入所述目标基站所需的资源和PC5无线资源；
    所述目标基站向所述源基站发送第一切换请求确认；其中，所述第一切换请求确认包括第二中继指示、第一切换命令和第二切换命令；所述第二中继指示用于通知所述源基站所述第一切换请求确认是 针对所述UE和所述WD的共同切换的确认，所述第一切换命令包括所述UE接入所述目标基站所需的资源和所述PC5无线资源，所述第二切换命令包括所述WD接入所述目标基站所需的资源和所述PC5无线资源。
  12. 根据权利要求10所述的方法，其特征在于，还包括：
    所述目标基站接收所述源基站发送的第二切换请求，所述第二切换请求中包括所述WD的上下文。
  13. 根据权利要求12所述的方法，其特征在于，在所述目标基站接收所述源基站发送的第二切换请求之后，还包括：
    所述目标基站根据所述WD的上下文，为所述WD分配与所述目标基站进行数据传输所需的数据无线承载DRB资源，以及接入所述目标基站所需的资源；
    所述目标基站向所述源基站发送第二切换请求确认；其中，所述第二切换请求确认包括所述WD接入所述目标基站所需的资源。
  14. 根据权利要求12或13所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述目标基站向移动管理实体MME发送直接路径转换指示，所述直接路径转换指示用于通知所述MME，所述WD已断开与所述UE之间的侧链接。
  15. 一种移动性管理方法，其特征在于，包括：
    可穿戴设备WD对当前驻留小区的信号质量进行测量，并对至少一个相邻小区的信号质量进行测量；所述WD与源基站直接连接，用于传输信令，并通过用户设备UE与所述源基站间接连接，用于传输用户面数据；
    所述WD在确定测量得到的所述当前驻留小区的信号质量低于第一测量门限，且所述当前驻留小区的相邻小区中存在小区的信号质量高于第三测量门限时，向所述源基站发送测量报告；其中，所述WD发送的测量报告中包括：所述WD获得的信号质量指示，所述WD测量得到的所述当前驻留小区的信号质量，以及至少一个信号质 量高于所述第三测量门限的相邻小区的信号质量和标识，所述信号质量指示用于指示所述WD和所述UE之间的侧链接的信号质量，以及所述信号质量的恶化趋势；
    所述WD接收所述源基站发送的第二切换命令，所述第二切换命令包括所述WD接入目标基站所需的资源和PC5无线资源；
    所述WD根据接入所述目标基站所需的资源接入所述目标基站，并根据所述PC5无线资源更新所述WD和所述UE之间的侧链接资源。
  16. 根据权利要求15所述的方法，其特征在于，在所述向所述源基站发送测量报告之后，还包括：
    所述WD接收所述源基站发送的第三切换命令和指示信息，所述第三切换命令包括所述WD接入所述目标基站所需的资源；
    所述WD根据接入所述目标基站所需的资源接入所述目标基站，并根据所述指示信息断开与所述UE之间的侧链接。
  17. 根据权利要求15或16所述的方法，其特征在于，在所述向所述源基站发送测量报告之前，还包括：
    所述WD获取侧链接信号强度和第一指示，以获得所述信号质量指示，所述侧链接信号强度用于表示所述WD和所述UE之间的侧链接的信号质量，所述第一指示用于指示所述WD和所述UE之间的侧链接的信号质量的恶化趋势；或者，
    所述WD获取第二指示，以获得所述信号质量指示，所述第二指示用于指示所述WD和所述UE之间的侧链接的信号质量和所述WD和所述UE之间的侧链接的信号质量的恶化趋势。
  18. 一种源基站，其特征在于，包括：
    接收单元，用于接收可穿戴设备WD发送的测量报告；所述WD与所述源基站直接连接，用于传输信令，并通过用户设备UE与所述源基站间接连接，用于传输用户面数据，所述WD发送的测量报告中包括：所述WD获得的信号质量指示，所述WD测量得到的当前驻留小区的信号质量，以及至少一个相邻小区的信号质量和标识，所述信 号质量指示用于指示所述WD和所述UE之间的侧链接的信号质量，以及所述信号质量的恶化趋势；
    确定单元，用于在确定所述接收单元接收到的所述WD测量得到的当前驻留小区的信号质量低于第一测量门限，且确定所述接收单元接收到的每个所述相邻小区的信号质量高于第三测量门限时，确定所述WD需进行切换操作，根据所述接收单元接收到的所述WD获得的信号质量指示确定所述WD和所述UE需进行共同切换，并根据所述接收单元接收到的所述WD发送的测量报告中包括的相邻小区的标识确定第一目标小区；所述第一目标小区为所述WD和所述UE需共同切换到的小区；
    发送单元，用于向与所述确定单元确定出的所述第一目标小区对应的第一目标基站发送第一切换请求，所述第一切换请求中包括第一中继指示，所述第一中继指示用于指示所述第一目标基站对所述WD和所述UE执行共同切换。
  19. 根据权利要求18所述的源基站，其特征在于，
    所述接收单元，还用于接收所述UE发送的测量报告；所述UE发送的测量报告包括：所述UE获得的信号质量指示，所述UE测量得到的所述当前驻留小区的信号质量，以及至少一个相邻小区的信号质量；
    所述确定单元，还用于在确定所述接收单元接收到的所述UE测量得到的所述当前驻留小区的信号质量低于所述第一测量门限，且确定所述接收单元接收到的每个所述相邻小区的信号质量高于第二测量门限时，确定所述UE需进行切换操作；
    所述确定单元，具体用于在根据所述接收单元接收到的所述WD获得的信号质量指示和所述UE获得的信号质量指示确定所述WD和所述UE需进行共同切换。
  20. 根据权利要求19所述的源基站，其特征在于，当通过所述UE间接连接至所述源基站的WD存在至少两个时，所述接收单元接收到的所述UE发送的测量报告还包括：侧链接标识SLI；
    所述确定单元，还用于从所述至少两个WD中确定与所述SLI对应的所述WD为需与所述UE共同切换的WD。
  21. 根据权利要求19或20所述的源基站，其特征在于，所述接收单元接收到的所述UE发送的测量报告还包括：所述至少一个相邻小区的标识；
    所述确定单元，具体用于：
    从所述接收单元接收到的所述WD发送的测量报告中包括的至少一个相邻小区和所述UE发送的测量报告中包括的至少一个相邻小区中，选择出备选小区组，所述备选小区组中包括至少一个备选小区；
    当所述备选小区组中包括一个备选小区时，将该备选小区确定为所述第一目标小区；
    当所述备选小区组中包括至少两个备选小区时，将所述至少两个备选小区中所述UE测量得到的信号质量最好的小区确定为所述第一目标小区。
  22. 根据权利要求18-21中任一项所述的源基站，其特征在于，
    所述发送单元发送的所述第一切换请求中还包括：所述UE的上下文和所述WD的上下文；所述UE的上下文和所述WD的上下文用于所述第一目标基站为所述UE和所述WD分配接入所述第一目标基站所需的资源和PC5无线资源，所述PC5无线资源用于所述WD和所述UE更新所述WD和所述UE之间的侧链接资源。
  23. 根据权利要求22所述的源基站，其特征在于，
    所述接收单元，还用于接收所述第一目标基站发送的第一切换请求确认；其中，所述第一切换请求确认包括第二中继指示、第一切换命令和第二切换命令；所述第二中继指示用于通知所述源基站所述第一切换请求确认是针对所述UE和所述WD的共同切换的确认，所述第一切换命令包括所述UE接入所述第一目标基站所需的资源和所述PC5无线资源，所述第二切换命令包括所述WD接入所述第一目标基站所需的资源和所述PC5无线资源；
    所述发送单元，还用于向所述UE发送所述接收单元接收到的所 述第一切换命令，并向所述WD发送所述接收单元接收到的所述第二切换命令。
  24. 根据权利要求18所述的源基站，其特征在于，
    所述确定单元，还用于根据所述接收单元接收到的所述WD获得的信号质量指示确定所述WD需进行单独切换；
    所述确定单元，还用于将所述接收单元接收到的所述WD发送的测量报告中包括的相邻小区中信号质量最好的小区确定为第二目标小区；所述第二目标小区为所述WD需单独切换到的小区；
    所述发送单元，还用于向与所述确定单元确定出的所述第二目标小区对应的第二目标基站发送第二切换请求，所述第二切换请求中包括所述WD的上下文。
  25. 根据权利要求24所述的源基站，其特征在于，
    所述接收单元，还用于接收所述第二目标基站发送的第二切换请求确认；其中，所述第二切换请求确认包括所述WD接入所述第二目标基站所需的资源；
    所述发送单元，还用于向所述WD发送第三切换命令和指示信息，所述第三切换命令包括所述接收单元接收到的所述WD接入所述第二目标基站所需的资源，所述指示信息用于指示所述WD断开与所述UE之间的侧链接。
  26. 根据权利要求19-25中任一项所述的源基站，其特征在于，所述确定单元，具体用于：
    根据所述WD获得的侧链接信号强度和第一指示，以及所述UE获得所述侧链接信号强度和所述第一指示，确定所述WD和所述UE需进行共同切换，所述侧链接信号强度用于表示所述WD和所述UE之间的侧链接的信号质量，所述第一指示用于指示所述WD和所述UE之间的侧链接的信号质量的恶化趋势；或者，
    根据所述WD获得的第二指示，以及所述UE获得所述第二指示，确定所述WD和所述UE需进行共同切换，所述第二指示用于指示所述WD和所述UE之间的侧链接的信号质量和所述WD和所述UE之 间的侧链接的信号质量的恶化趋势。
  27. 一种目标基站，其特征在于，包括：
    接收单元，用于接收源基站发送的第一切换请求，所述第一切换请求中包括第一中继指示，所述第一中继指示用于指示所述目标基站对可穿戴设备WD和用户设备UE执行共同切换，所述WD与所述源基站直接连接，用于传输信令，并通过所述UE与所述源基站间接连接，用于传输用户面数据；
    切换单元，用于根据所述接收单元接收到的所述第一切换请求对所述WD和所述UE执行共同切换。
  28. 根据权利要求27所述的目标基站，其特征在于，所述接收单元接收的所述第一切换请求中还包括：所述UE的上下文和所述WD的上下文，所述切换单元，具体用于：
    复用所述接收单元接收到的所述UE的上下文和所述WD的上下文，并根据所述UE的上下文和所述WD的上下文为所述UE和所述WD分配接入所述目标基站所需的资源和PC5无线资源；
    向所述源基站发送第一切换请求确认；其中，所述第一切换请求确认包括第二中继指示、第一切换命令和第二切换命令；所述第二中继指示用于通知所述源基站所述第一切换请求确认是针对所述UE和所述WD的共同切换的确认，所述第一切换命令包括所述UE接入所述目标基站所需的资源和所述PC5无线资源，所述第二切换命令包括所述WD接入所述目标基站所需的资源和所述PC5无线资源。
  29. 根据权利要求27所述的目标基站，其特征在于，
    所述接收单元，还用于接收所述源基站发送的第二切换请求，所述第二切换请求中包括所述WD的上下文。
  30. 根据权利要求29所述的目标基站，其特征在于，还包括：
    分配单元，用于根据所述接收单元接收到的所述WD的上下文，为所述WD分配与所述目标基站进行数据传输所需的数据无线承载DRB资源，以及接入所述目标基站所需的资源；
    发送单元，用于向所述源基站发送第二切换请求确认；其中，所 述第二切换请求确认包括所述分配单元分配的所述WD接入所述目标基站所需的资源。
  31. 根据权利要求29或30所述的目标基站，其特征在于，
    所述发送单元，还用于向移动管理实体MME发送直接路径转换指示，所述直接路径转换指示用于通知所述MME，所述WD已断开与所述UE之间的侧链接。
  32. 一种可穿戴设备WD，其特征在于，包括：
    测量单元，用于对当前驻留小区的信号质量进行测量，并对至少一个相邻小区的信号质量进行测量；所述WD与源基站直接连接，用于传输信令，并通过用户设备UE与所述源基站间接连接，用于传输用户面数据；
    发送单元，用于在确定所述测量单元测量得到的所述当前驻留小区的信号质量低于第一测量门限，且所述当前驻留小区的相邻小区中存在小区的信号质量高于第三测量门限时，向所述源基站发送测量报告；其中，所述WD发送的测量报告中包括：所述WD获得的信号质量指示，所述测量单元测量得到的所述当前驻留小区的信号质量，以及至少一个信号质量高于所述第三测量门限的相邻小区的信号质量和标识，所述信号质量指示用于指示所述WD和所述UE之间的侧链接的信号质量，以及所述信号质量的恶化趋势；
    接收单元，用于接收所述源基站发送的第二切换命令，所述第二切换命令包括所述WD接入所述目标基站所需的资源和PC5无线资源；
    接入单元，用于根据所述接收单元接收到的接入所述目标基站所需的资源接入所述目标基站；
    更新单元，用于根据所述接收单元接收到的所述PC5无线资源更新所述WD和所述UE之间的侧链接资源。
  33. 根据权利要求32所述的WD，其特征在于，还包括：断开单元；
    所述接收单元，还用于接收所述源基站发送的第三切换命令和指 示信息，所述第三切换命令包括所述WD接入所述目标基站所需的资源；
    所述接入单元，还用于根据所述接收单元接收到的接入所述目标基站所需的资源接入所述目标基站；
    所述断开单元，用于根据所述接收单元接收到的所述指示信息断开与所述UE之间的侧链接。
  34. 根据权利要求32或33所述的WD，其特征在于，还包括：获取单元，用于：
    获取侧链接信号强度和第一指示，以获得所述信号质量指示，所述侧链接信号强度用于表示所述WD和所述UE之间的侧链接的信号质量，所述第一指示用于指示所述WD和所述UE之间的侧链接的信号质量的恶化趋势；或者，
    获取第二指示，以获得所述信号质量指示，所述第二指示用于指示所述WD和所述UE之间的侧链接的信号质量和所述WD和所述UE之间的侧链接的信号质量的恶化趋势。
  35. 一种源基站，其特征在于，包括：处理器、存储器和收发器；
    所述存储器用于存储计算机执行指令，当所述源基站运行时，所述处理器执行所述存储器存储的所述计算机执行指令，以使所述源基站执行如权利要求1-9任意一项所述的移动性管理方法。
  36. 一种目标基站，其特征在于，包括：处理器、存储器和收发器；
    所述存储器用于存储计算机执行指令，当所述目标基站运行时，所述处理器执行所述存储器存储的所述计算机执行指令，以使所述目标基站执行如权利要求10-14任意一项所述的移动性管理方法。
  37. 一种可穿戴设备WD，其特征在于，包括：处理器、存储器和收发器；
    所述存储器用于存储计算机执行指令，当所述WD运行时，所述处理器执行所述存储器存储的所述计算机执行指令，以使所述WD执行如权利要求15-17任意一项所述的移动性管理方法。
PCT/CN2016/108083 2016-11-30 2016-11-30 一种移动性管理方法、基站及可穿戴设备 WO2018098708A1 (zh)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2016/108083 WO2018098708A1 (zh) 2016-11-30 2016-11-30 一种移动性管理方法、基站及可穿戴设备
CN201680080724.9A CN108605258B (zh) 2016-11-30 2016-11-30 一种移动性管理方法、基站及可穿戴设备

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2016/108083 WO2018098708A1 (zh) 2016-11-30 2016-11-30 一种移动性管理方法、基站及可穿戴设备

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2018098708A1 true WO2018098708A1 (zh) 2018-06-07

Family

ID=62240942

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2016/108083 WO2018098708A1 (zh) 2016-11-30 2016-11-30 一种移动性管理方法、基站及可穿戴设备

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN108605258B (zh)
WO (1) WO2018098708A1 (zh)

Cited By (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN111212459A (zh) * 2018-11-22 2020-05-29 华为技术有限公司 一种中继通信方法及装置
CN111919469A (zh) * 2020-02-27 2020-11-10 北京小米移动软件有限公司 信号测量方法、装置、通信设备及存储介质
US11968633B2 (en) 2018-11-22 2024-04-23 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Relay communication method and apparatus

Families Citing this family (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20200229143A1 (en) * 2019-01-10 2020-07-16 Industrial Technology Research Institute Method for allocating and requesting sidelink resources, base station and user device
CN114501570A (zh) * 2020-11-13 2022-05-13 维沃移动通信有限公司 基于侧链路中继的切换方法、装置、设备及存储介质
CN114698041A (zh) * 2020-12-31 2022-07-01 华为技术有限公司 一种无线通信的方法及其装置
WO2022141575A1 (zh) * 2020-12-31 2022-07-07 北京小米移动软件有限公司 一种参考时间信息的使用方法及装置
CN117560688A (zh) * 2022-08-03 2024-02-13 大唐移动通信设备有限公司 移动性管理方法、网络设备及终端

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN101296486A (zh) * 2007-04-28 2008-10-29 中兴通讯股份有限公司 同步切换方法和系统
US20130102314A1 (en) * 2010-03-05 2013-04-25 Nokia Corporation Handover of direct peer to peer communication
CN103200634A (zh) * 2012-01-05 2013-07-10 华为技术有限公司 小区间切换的方法及装置
CN105848224A (zh) * 2016-03-11 2016-08-10 深圳市金立通信设备有限公司 一种小区切换方法、系统及相关设备

Family Cites Families (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN101064956B (zh) * 2006-04-28 2011-06-15 华为技术有限公司 长期演进网络的用户设备在相异系统间的切换方法
US9674740B2 (en) * 2012-08-03 2017-06-06 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Method and arrangement for mobility procedures supporting user equipment groups

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN101296486A (zh) * 2007-04-28 2008-10-29 中兴通讯股份有限公司 同步切换方法和系统
US20130102314A1 (en) * 2010-03-05 2013-04-25 Nokia Corporation Handover of direct peer to peer communication
CN103200634A (zh) * 2012-01-05 2013-07-10 华为技术有限公司 小区间切换的方法及装置
CN105848224A (zh) * 2016-03-11 2016-08-10 深圳市金立通信设备有限公司 一种小区切换方法、系统及相关设备

Cited By (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN111212459A (zh) * 2018-11-22 2020-05-29 华为技术有限公司 一种中继通信方法及装置
CN111212459B (zh) * 2018-11-22 2021-09-14 华为技术有限公司 一种中继通信方法及装置
US11968633B2 (en) 2018-11-22 2024-04-23 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Relay communication method and apparatus
CN111919469A (zh) * 2020-02-27 2020-11-10 北京小米移动软件有限公司 信号测量方法、装置、通信设备及存储介质

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN108605258A (zh) 2018-09-28
CN108605258B (zh) 2021-02-12

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
CN107889080B (zh) 一种支持远端用户设备移动性的方法及装置
CN110741726B (zh) 主基站发起的辅基站释放与辅基站发起的辅基站改变过程之间的竞争条件避免
JP7131643B2 (ja) モビリティ管理装置、通信装置、及びこれらの通信方法
US10945179B2 (en) Communication path switching method and device
WO2018098708A1 (zh) 一种移动性管理方法、基站及可穿戴设备
US11470518B2 (en) Relaying between a user equipment and a network
US11350467B2 (en) Mobile communication system, relay node, and base station
JP6222112B2 (ja) 無線通信システム、基地局、移動局、通信制御方法、及びプログラム
KR20160054457A (ko) Bbu의 rru 정보 획득 방법 및 bbu
EP2919520A1 (en) Radio communication system and communication control method
WO2018062286A1 (ja) 通信システム、無線アクセス装置、及び無線通信端末並びにこれらの制御方法
KR20150065874A (ko) 디바이스 투 디바이스 통신, 기지국 및 통신 시스템에서의 핸드오버 방법
WO2014032311A1 (zh) 回程链路的信息传输方法及系统、代理设备、接入设备
JP2022043218A (ja) 通信方法、セカンダリネットワークノード及び端末
US20150172963A1 (en) Radio communication system and base station
JP5898396B1 (ja) ユーザ端末、プロセッサ、及び基地局
CN107005904B (zh) 一种用户设备切换方法和装置
US9408117B2 (en) Base station device, handover controlling method, and radio communication system
WO2022082690A1 (zh) 群组切换的方法、装置和系统
JP6055255B2 (ja) 移動通信方法
CN114731544A (zh) 一种基于网络切片的数据传输方法、装置和系统

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 16922833

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 16922833

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1